JP7201976B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine having control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2004-135843

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to make it possible to easily grasp that a game machine is in a settable state .

According to a representative aspect of the present invention, in a gaming machine comprising a game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, effect control means for controlling effects related to the variable display game; and the effect control means. and a setting means capable of setting a set value relating to a game condition, wherein the game control means is provided outside the game machine. It is possible to output a predetermined signal as external information to an external device, and the setting means is in a settable state in which the setting value can be set , and the RAM provided in the game control means is initialized. In response to this, the predetermined signal is output, and in response to the setting enabled state, the RAM is initialized, and when the game machine is powered on, the RAM is initialized. A legitimacy determination is made, and if the result of the legitimacy determination is not valid, the state is shifted to a game stop state in which the setting enable state is set as a cancellation condition, and a first game control related to game control is stored in the RAM. A work area and a first stack area, a second work area and a second stack area related to gaming machine performance calculated based on the amount of gaming value obtained, and a space between the first stack area and the second work area and an unused area, wherein the first work area is subject to the validity determination, and the first stack area, the second work area and the second stack area are excluded from the validity determination, During the timer interrupt, the setting means performs processing for setting the set value, and after completing the setting of the set value, the RAM is initialized (hereinafter referred to as " Initialization A”) is performed, and after the initialization A is completed, a state is set in which timer interrupts are permitted. The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the first movable effect means when the game machine is powered on, and the setting is performed when the game machine is powered on. When the settable state is set, the initial operation of the first movable performance means is not executed in the settable state, and the initial operation of the first movable performance means can be executed when the settable state ends.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp that a game machine is in a settable state .

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of output processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability set value confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a figure which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a figure which illustrates big-hit design distribution (big-hit breakdown) of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of design variation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example (1) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (2) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (3) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (4) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (5) of a display of the collective display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the example (6) of a display of a batch display apparatus during probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows big-hit system command processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop design mode in the chance eye look-ahead effect according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop design aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (part 1) according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (part 2) according to the second embodiment; It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view when the board effect device of the game board according to the third embodiment operates. FIG. 11 is a front view when the frame effect device for the glass frame according to the third embodiment operates. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of movable body control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of initial operation control processing according to a comparative example of the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a set value receiving process according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of setting suggestion production|presentation of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an ending effect setting process according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing when receiving the number of out balls according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of RTC read processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure of count information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus at the time of becoming a big hit. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the display device when the jackpot is won. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining a display mode of a setting suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure of hall/player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the hole setting mode. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a customer waiting demonstration setting process according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when the holding display during special figure fluctuation of the holding digestion area changes. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area. In the fifth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is another example of the screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the pending digestion area or the effect display area. is. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating character codes and lighting patterns of corresponding characters according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between an initial setting command and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED driver initial setting processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between LED commands and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 78A is a diagram showing details of a state display device according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 78A is a diagram showing details of a character product ratio display unit that constitutes the state display device and displays character product ratios; FIG. 78(B) is a view showing the details of the number of discharged balls display section for displaying the number of discharged balls and the payout rate display section for displaying the payout rate, which constitute the state display device. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing procedures of initial setting processing of a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to a role ratio driver and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to a collective driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing procedures of an initial setting process of a collective driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to a batch driver, a role ratio driver, and a ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the first modified example of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device and the test-firing test signal transmitted to the test-firing test device when the settings are changed in the second modification of the seventh embodiment; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (1) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (part 2) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a modification of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of external information output when setting is finalized according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of outputting external information when confirming settings according to the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when settings are changed according to a modification of the ninth embodiment; FIG. 10 is another example in which the timing of outputting external information is changed when changing settings according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating the lighting pattern of the symbol number and the first special figure variation display portion 51 of the batch display device corresponding to the symbol number, and the lighting pattern of the probability set value. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing details of a state display device for displaying information about a payout rate according to the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing details of a state display device for displaying numbers indicating probability setting values according to the tenth embodiment; It is a figure (the 1) which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure (the 2) which illustrates the big-hit probability and small-hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing concerning an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an opening mode (small hit open pattern) of the special variable winning device in the small hit state. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating the hit probability of the normal pattern variation display game for each setting (each set value). In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating a display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device during customer waiting. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the light emission mode of a special-figure fluctuation|variation display part. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an external device according to an eleventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows a mode that the removable parts which concern on 12th Embodiment are attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows roughly the structural example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the configuration of a parallel-to-serial converter of an identification board according to a twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a first modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel-to-serial converter) according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel-to-serial converter) according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a third modified example of the identification substrate according to the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of parts collation processing according to the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a reference table that associates model designation commands with model identification information in the twelfth embodiment;

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes a performance device that performs lighting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of a game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that provides the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game, and directly below it is a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory, and rotates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. , and changes to an open state in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, the variable state (
Even in the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) will occur.

In the lower right game area 32 of the normal variable winning device 37, there is a large winning opening solenoid (39b) (
FIG. 3) is provided with a special variable prize winning device 39 having an attacker type open/close door 39c that opens the big prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state of the large winning opening closed (blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby winning a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, predetermined game values (prize balls) are awarded to the player. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the big winning hole as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. In addition, in the special variable winning device 39 and in the vicinity of the big winning opening (around the big winning opening), 1
One or a plurality of large prize winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) are provided.

General winning port 35, starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 39
When a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning winning hole. In addition, normal variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, an out port 30 for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port
b is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 is a first special figure variable display unit 5 for variable display games, which is composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D
2) and a variation display unit 53 for the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern display, lamps D8, D10, D
18), and a memory display unit (special figure 1 suspension display 54, special figure 2 suspension display 55, general figure suspension display 56) for notifying the number of starting (holding) memories of each variable display game. ing. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is a lamp D
13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying that the game is on, round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 39) A section 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as symbols (fourth special symbols to be described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41). conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is sent through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 .

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory, the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 indicator 52
Run the floating display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols). again,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display. fluctuate. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) is energized, so that the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the big winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, and during this time the player is given the privilege of being able to win a lot of game balls. be.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is energized so that the special prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state Value (number of balls won)
Less is. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not executed at the same time. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure fluctuation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93 that is turned on by an operator's turning operation or the like to change the setting value related to the game condition (game), and A set value change switch 102 that can change set values related to game conditions by
And prepare. In this embodiment, the set value related to the game condition (game) is the probability set value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions other than the jackpot probability (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation inrush rate) are also set according to the probability set value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 are
A setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (set values) relating to game conditions is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the setting value, but an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. It may be provided in the game control device 100 and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 . In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 are installed on the game control device 100.
2 (body frame) may be provided at a position where access is not possible unless the body frame is opened.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9 is opened.
3 is turned on, the operator presses the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
By operating , it is possible to change the settings (set values) relating to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the variable probability entry rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is the variable setting state in which the setting (set value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to the ON position to turn on the power, the setting variable state corresponding to the state in which the setting is being changed is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. The setting variable state may be a state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the power is turned on, or a state in which both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be a configurable state

In the present embodiment, the set values related to the game conditions are defined in six stages, set value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). A set value of 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and a set value of 6
is the most advantageous setting for the player. Setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change process, the operator operates the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
Each time is operated, the set value (setting) is set in the following order: set value 1 → set value 2 → set value 3 → set value 4 → set value 5 → set value 6 → set value 1 → set value 2 → ... change to and select. Note that the setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Also, the set value is not limited to six steps. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability set value display device 143 or the like, which is a 7-segment display. In addition, the probability setting value display device 143 is connected to the setting value change switch 102 via an electric circuit.
The display may be changed in direct association with the operation of . As will be described later, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 for the variation display game of the collective display device 50. good too.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, the touch switch signal is sent to the game control device 1.
When 00 is entered, the selected (changed) setting value (that is, setting) is determined and stored in the probability setting value area in the RWM (storage means), and the setting value changing process ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, the setting). A configuration is also possible.

On the other hand, after the game machine 10 is powered on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to turn it from off to on, setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).
become. In the setting value confirmation mode, the setting value displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure variation display unit 52 for the variation display game of the collective display device 50 . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from a speaker.

Note that the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA
M clear switch), and when the initialization switch is in the ON state at the time of power-on (power supply restoration), an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the game microcomputer 11
1 and the information stored in the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b stores non-volatile information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. used as ROM 111b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the normal reach (
N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach.
Also, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in second starting winning port 37
, connected to the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39,
An interface chip (proximity I) receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21 outputs, gate switch 34a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, prize winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 39a detection signals are the third input port 1
24.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal is input from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) or the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123 .

The second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 and outputs them to the game microcomputer via the data bus 140. 111.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out-ball detection switch signal from the out-ball detection switch are taken in and sent to the game microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
11 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not In this embodiment,
An out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs opening/closing data of a solenoid (universal electrical solenoid) 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 is provided for output.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

The output unit 130 is also provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information on the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143 .
In this embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), but the information of the setting value (probability setting value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may be output to the probability setting value display device 143 via an LED driver).

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the opening/closing data signal of the big winning opening solenoid 39b, and a segment on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. a second driver 1 for outputting line on/off drive signals;
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138 d is provided for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. A fourth terminal for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 has a driver 150 that receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives a status display device 152. is provided. In this embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment (8-segment including dots) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The state display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the status display device 152 may be of the 4-digit, 7-segment type (
It is an 8-segment type display including the dot part), and it is possible to display the role ratio, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls. Note that the status display device 152 is not limited to directly displaying the role product ratio, the ball payout ratio, and the number of discharged balls, but may indirectly display the number of discharged balls, the payout ratio, and the role product ratio. good.
That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information regarding the ratio of the role product, the ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball shooting device to the game area 32 . The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch. In this embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35,
A starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port, starting port 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting port 2), and a special variable winning device 39 (big winning port) are included. The number of ejected balls is counted down, and (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and the number is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). Note that the number of discharged balls may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99".

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the ball output rate is easily obtained from the number of balls obtained between 0 and 100 discharged balls every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). It should be noted that every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout ball rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. Thus, if the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the state display device 152, the ball output rate is displayed.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device, the normal pattern variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
to a second variable display time that is shorter than the normal first variable display time (eg, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern stop time to display the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the first
A second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so as not to open 7b (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, the setting key switch 93,
Set value change switch 102, glass frame open detection switch 63, front frame open detection switch 6
4 (body frame open detection switch) can be read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

A setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch signal from the set value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3). By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of , the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the set value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are read after the waiting time has passed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are operated after the waiting time has passed, and the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating the setting key switch 93 immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and checks the number of times (
For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1
009).

Game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y
'), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been kept on for the number of checks set in step A1008 (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal.

Also, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015 ). Furthermore, the driver 15 that drives the status display device 152
0 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of status display device 152 . The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver). The duty ratio of driver 150 may be lower than normal to make each LED darker with less power consumption. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used for the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used in the number-of-digits setting section of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). And if it is normal (A101
7 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is "Y"), the checksum for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear top address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability set value area from the RAM area to be cleared. According to the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers,
It includes a variation pattern random number area for storing variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area #2. The clear area #2 includes a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152, such as the character ratio, and a status display stack area for processing the information to be displayed on the status display device 152. can't

In addition, in FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area and the game control stack area, which consist of the probability set value area, the random number area, and the control information area. Also, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. again,
The status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the bottom of FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state, during the setting change state) (A1022). When the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is "Y"), it executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
2 (body frame) can be determined to be in the open state. In addition, in step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is open, or whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Incidentally, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (body frame) is open (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), the RAM is initialized in the variable setting state in steps A1036-A1041 because it is in the variable setting state in which the setting (set value) can be changed. processing (RAM clearing processing) and processing during setting change.

Game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of closed state)
(The result of A1023 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
4 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1
025). If the set value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N
”), the normal power-on (power recovery) processing of steps A1031 to A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1
025 is "Y"), the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing of steps A1042 to A1045 is executed. Here, with the setting key switch 93 in the off state, the set value change switch 102 is operated (pushed) and turned on when the power is turned on. RAM clear switch). In fact, there is no situation in which the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (result of A1023 is "N"). A set value change switch 102 that can also function as an initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
constitutes initialization means for initializing the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is "N", or the result of A1018 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1020 is "N"), the RAM 111c has an abnormality, and the process proceeds to the processing for dealing with the RAM abnormality from step A1026 onwards. First, R.
The AM clear top address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the clear target RAM area. RAM clear top address 1, R
The AM area is set to clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area #1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability set value area, a random number area, and a control information area) and a game control stack area. The clear area #1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 .

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1027). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

The game control device 100, when the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A1028 is "Y"), it is in the variable setting state in which the setting value can be changed.
Initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) and processing during setting change are executed. RA in this case
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be resolved.

Game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the case of closed state)
(The result of A1027 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102
The result of 8 is "N"), and a setting change instruction command for prompting the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the setting change instruction command displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting. By the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on in order for the player to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM abnormality is resolved by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes processing to prohibit access to the RWM (A10
30), wait until the game machine is powered off.

Next, the processing at steps A1031 to A1035 when the power is turned on normally (when the power is restored) will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area #2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a blackout inspection area,
A checksum area and an area for error fraud monitoring are included. Note that the payout control device 200
A busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. After that, the game control device 100 checks the area storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1032 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processing of steps A1033 and A1034 and proceeds to the processing of step A1035. Also, when the game state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 032 is "Y"), save the ON information in the high probability notification flag area (A1033),
For example, the ON (lighting) data of the high-probability notification LED (third game state display unit 59, error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1035), and step A1046 Go to processing.

Next, RAM initialization processing (RAM
Clear processing) and processing during setting change will be explained.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
. If the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM area to be cleared is the RAM clear start address 2, so the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C is set.
becomes. If the RAM 111c is abnormal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the clear area #1 in FIG. 5C is set because the RAM clear head address 1 is set. That is, RAM
Although the probability setting value area is not cleared in the normal state, the probability setting value area is also cleared in the case of a RAM abnormality.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in an open state, and the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. It is possible to output information such as what has been done to an external device (hall computer, etc.). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved in the probability setting value area as an initial value.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability set value changing flag indicating that the setting is in a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed (that is, that the setting is being changed) (A1038).
Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when changing the probability setting value (A1039), the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is changed. Save in the work probability setting value area as initial data when changing (A104
0). Subsequently, a command during probability setting change indicating that the setting variable state (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1041), step A104.
Move to the process of 6. By the command during probability setting change, production control device 300 can recognize that it is in a setting variable state (probability setting is being changed).

Next, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, set value change switch 102) in steps A1042 to A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear head address 2 (A1042),
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear head address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area #2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, RAM initialization (
RAM clear), the probability set value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is sent to the effect control device 300
(Production control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1035 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 045 includes a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command indicating the number of reservations of special figures 1 and 2, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command indicating the state of the probability. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game was running when the power was turned off, the recovery screen command, and if the customer was waiting when the power was turned off, the customer waiting demo command , includes a power-on command indicating that the power has been turned on. Furthermore, depending on the model, a performance mode information command indicating the state of the performance mode, a performance number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM (RAM clear) notification 3
0 seconds.

Further, the command for power failure recovery and the command for RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information that is information on the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. be The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start (A104
6). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC
update permission register) to set the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit, etc.
It is performed by PU 111a. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining jackpot patterns (jackpot patterns) Random number 1, jackpot pattern random number 2), random number to determine the small winning pattern (small winning pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number), random number to determine the winning pattern of the general pattern (hit pattern random number) etc.) as an initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of RWM (A1048
), and interrupts are permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, and hit random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the PU. A CTC (C
It is a "slow counter" that is updated on the basis of TC2)).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number and the winning pattern random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed.
That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers and winning random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control device 100, the power supply device 40
Set the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 via the port and data bus (A1051), and determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1052 is "N"), step A
Return to the initial value random number update process of 1050 . That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update process (A1050), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be initialized. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process due to waiting due to the value random number update process. It should be noted that while the setting is being changed (during the variable setting state), the processing of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to updating the initial value random number may not be executed.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step A1050 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and releasing the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is "Y"), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal has been kept ON for the number of checks set in step A1051 (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal has not been on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "Y"), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, once interrupt is prohibited (A1054), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A105
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1057). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). moreover,
Based on the output data set in various processes, the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b)
Output processing for controlling the driving of actuators such as the above is executed (A1304). It should be noted that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing,
By performing this output processing, a firing permission signal is output, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 performs random number update processing 1 (A1305), random number update processing 2 (A1
306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small winning symbol random number, the winning random number, and the winning symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number updating process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 need not be executed when the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state).
After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitoring errors (front frame and (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes probability setting value change processing for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed is determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A103
8). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation state) (A1310). When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being checked.

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A131
The result of 0 is "N"), the command set in the transmission buffer by various processing is sent to the payout control device 2
A payout command transmission process for outputting to 00 is executed (A1311). Furthermore, a special figure game process for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing processing relating to a normal figure variation display game is performed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting is being changed (result of A1309 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1310 is "Y"), so payout command transmission processing (A
1311), special figure game processing (A1312), normal figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10, and executes a segment LED editing process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying various information about special figure variation games and games so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, if there is an abnormality, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area. Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, if there is an abnormality, the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area.

After that, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display editing output process, as output data to the state display device 152, the ratio of the character, the ball output rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output processing, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated. You may clear the stack area. afterwards,
End timer interrupt processing. When the timer interrupt process returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed.
Depending on the U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting an interrupt or a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) OFF data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the big winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output/external information output (A1606). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is transferred to the third output port 135 for segment output.
(A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for launch permission (A161
0), the finally synthesized data is sent to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information/launch permission signal.
(A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data for probability set value display (A161
2). The OFF output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period in which probability set value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability set value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value changing process described later.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the game control device 100 (A16
13 is "Y"), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is sent to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is sent to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). output to (A161
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1
621). Here, the display data of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), ie, the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display data area, is output as the test signal output data related to the probability setting values. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing set values, or output data in other forms. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "
N"), and outputs the test signal output data of the probability setting value as it is to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624).

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning hole switch/state monitoring process. Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing is executed at step A1307 in the timer interrupt processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (A2001
(A20
02). If the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the monitoring processing and the like from steps A2003 to A2010 are executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is "Y"), the glass frame 15 may be released. There is a possibility that a game ball can be put into any of the winning holes by hand, and it is meaningless to perform monitoring processing, etc., so step A20
03 to A2010 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A2011.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A2001 is "N"),
A winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, fraud and winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the big winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (A2005).
Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37 (A2007). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). Winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes winning number counter update processing for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose state is to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2013).
. Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shot ball running out error) based on the shot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. State scan counter value is 2
, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state (discharge abnormality error) based on the dispensation abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2015).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016
result is "N"), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, the game control device 100 (A2
The result of 016 is "Y"), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and gaming machine status check processing is executed to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2018).
.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Incidentally, in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter is 1 to 3, it is not defined.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes payout busy signal check processing for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019 ), ending the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, if the timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 6 ms.

In addition, in the fraud & winning monitoring process (A2008), the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39
) and the number of winning balls for each role (total number of winning balls) related to the normal variable prize winning device 37 are counted and stored, and information on the number of winning prizes and the number of won balls for each role is set as a production command. good.
In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls for each role (total number of winning balls) regarding the starting winning hole 36 and the general winning hole 35 are counted and stored, Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. In addition, in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the out ball detection switch counts and stores the number of out balls (the number of ejected balls), and furthermore, the information of the number of out balls is produced by a production command (number of out balls command). can be set as The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls for each role) to the number of discharged balls. The role ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls won by each role) out of the total number of prize balls (= the so-called continuous role ratio). be. In the state display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the state display device 152, the character ratio, the ball output rate, the number of discharged balls, etc. may be calculated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The game machine status check process is performed at step A2013 in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.
Executed in A2015 and A2018.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (
A2202). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2204). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2205). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2207). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100
(A2
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (result of A2209 is "N"), save the acquired signal state in the target signal control area (A2210), and clear the target state monitoring timer (
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212).
. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - The value remains at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (A221
5 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value change processing (A1308) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is being changed (during the variable setting state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"),
Probability setting value confirmation processing for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

When the game control device 100 is changing the probability set value (the result of A2401 is "Y")
If the probability setting value turn-off timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2403), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value turn-off timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value turn-off timer is 0 (result of A2404 is "Y"), set the probability setting value display permission flag (A2405),
The process proceeds to step A2406. If the probability setting value turn-off timer is not 0 (A24
04 result is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value has been changed in step A2406 (A2406). If a probability setting value changed flag, which will be described later, is set, the probability setting value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (A2
If the result of 406 is "Y"), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is "N
”), and it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the set value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch 102, the game control device 100 (A240
7 is "Y"), the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (A24
08). In this manner, the value in the working probability setting value area is increased by one each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated. After the value in the work probability setting value area has become 5, the value in the work probability setting value area may return to 0 when the set value change switch 102 is operated.
Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. Note that the probability setting values are not limited to six stages.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value turn-off timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to an extinguishing period (blank period) during which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

In this way, when the probability set value turn-off timer is 0, by setting the probability set value display permission flag, the probability set value display data is probabilistically set as the probability set value (probability set value for work) being changed. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) by the probability set value turn off timer, the light is turned off for a predetermined turn off period, so even if there is only one setting (when the set value is only 1) , the operation of the set value change switch 102 can be visually recognized on the probability set value display device 143 .

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (A2411). If there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "N"), the probability set value change process is terminated. If there is a touch switch signal input (result of A2411 is "Y"), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal serves as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability setting values are stored in the probability setting value area.

A configuration is also possible in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time elapses after the variable setting state. Also, an operable confirmation button switch (operating means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from this confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the setting value. . That is, instead of operating the touch switch, operation of a newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 . Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is issued to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) to (A241
5), the probability set value change process is terminated.

In the process of ending the setting change from step A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
0 first determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). If the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is "N"), the probability set value changing process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (result of A2416 is "Y")
, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area #3 in FIG. 5C.
becomes. Clear area #3 consists of control information area (area from blackout inspection area 1 to checksum area) and stack area for game control, probability set value area and random number area are excluded. Note that the clear area #3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area #2, and the random numbers updated during the setting change are not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for setting change, such as the information in the working probability setting value area, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag, are cleared. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since this is the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall computer, etc.). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change is completed to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2421), main processing (
Returning to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. Commands to be sent here are the above-mentioned model designation command, decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), probability setting change end Command (A command for RAM initialization may be used). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the probability setting change, for example, displays a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the LED of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker. Do for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability set value confirmation processing (A2402) in the probability set value change processing described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability set value confirmation processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (in a set value confirmable state), which is a mode in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (the result of A2501 is "Y"), the processing from step A2509 onwards is executed.

If the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
N"), clear the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (A2503). For example, if a variable display game is being executed or a jackpot state is in progress, it can be determined that a game is being played. If the game is being played (the result of A2503 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated to disable confirmation of the probability setting value. When not in play (A
If the result of 2503 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2).
504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is "N"), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A2504 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). This will
When the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (result of A2401 is "N")
, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, a probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation possible state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. Next, the probability set value display permission flag is set (A2
506). As a result, the probability setting values are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output processing (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area in order to enable the output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 is opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). A command during probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A2509 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2509 is "N"), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability set value confirmation mode is terminated. and,
In order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a probability set value confirmation end command indicating that the probability set value confirmation has ended is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2
512).

In the above, the set value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the set value change switch 102 . In this case, when the power is turned on (power is restored),
When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting variable state (setting change state) occurs. When the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, the RAM can be initialized (RAM clear), and the setting key switch 93
and the RAM initialization switch are turned off, the normal power is turned on (power is restored). Further, the set value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. note that,
The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, the special game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation. Execute (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is later mentioned in FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure, the processing during the special figure fluctuation which performs the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display is executed (A2609). In addition, for details of the special figure fluctuation process, see Figure 2
8 later.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100
To set a fanfare command according to the type of the big win, set a fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big win for each big win, and perform processing during the fanfare/interval if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big win. Executes special figure display processing for setting necessary information etc. (A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big win fanfare command (production command), a big win fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), Set the processing number "3" for fanfare/interval processing and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command (production command) and a small win fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" relating to the small win fanfare mid-process. and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval process, necessary information such as the round command (production command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big winning opening is set, and the processing number related to the big winning opening opening process is set. Set "4" and save it in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set as effect commands, a processing number "5" relating to the remaining ball processing of the big winning opening is set, and a special game processing number area is set. save to .

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing. Execute (A2613). For example, in the big winning hole remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set to the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the jackpot end processing to set the information necessary for executing the special figure normal processing (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, set the necessary information such as the probability state after the end of the jackpot state and the general electric support state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot state. command), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability information command includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, electric support number) in the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state. including information on

If the game processing number is "7" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Small win fanfare process for setting the opening time of the big winning hole, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing small win process, etc. is executed (A2615). For example, in the small winning fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the big winning opening is set, the processing number "8" relating to the small winning middle processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "8" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute small hit medium processing that performs setting of information necessary for performing small hit remaining ball processing (A2
616). For example, in the small-hit medium process, necessary information such as the small-hit remaining ball processing time is set, the processing number "9" relating to the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "9" at step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the small hit remaining ball processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing (A
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small winning ending time is set, the processing number "10" relating to the special figure small hitting end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small winning end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure normal processing (
A2618).

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2619), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2622). Details of the pattern variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting prize-winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and executes the starting prize-winning port 36.
(A2703). If there is no winning to the starting winning port 36 (
If the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A
If the result of step A2704 is "N"), the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), prepare the right-handed instruction notification command as the production command (A2705), and execute the production command setting process ( A2706).

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, a prize is not awarded to the starting prize-winning port 36 unless the ball is hit to the left, and a prize is not awarded to the normal fluctuation prize-winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state In the case of hitting to the left), a hitting to the right instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 instructs to hit to the right (
warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no prize to the 2nd start prize gate (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents further generation of starting memories.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing in the start switch monitoring process (A2708, A
2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2912). If it is not a prize to the starting prize mouth 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"
), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if it is a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number is extracted and prepared (A2913),
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2915), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2
916). Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2917), production command setting processing (A291
8) is executed to end the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (A2916) in the starting port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead (preliminary determination) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

The game control device 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not the starting opening winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is won (A300
1). If it is not a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), step A3
004 is processed. On the other hand, if it is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during special figure time saving (during general electricity support state) (A300
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A3002 is "Y"). On the other hand, if it is not during the special working hours reduction (A3
When the result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (A30
03). When it is during the big hit or during the small hit (result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the midst of a big hit or a small hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit by whether or not the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. (A3004). And if the judgment result is a big hit (
If the result of A3005 is "Y"), set the jackpot pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch (A3006), and acquire the stop pattern information corresponding to the jackpot pattern random number prepared in step A2910 ( A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (A3008). If the winning to the start winning opening 36 is not achieved (the result of A3008 is "N"), set stop symbol information (A3013) and shift to the processing of step A3014.

If the game control device 100 is winning to the starting winning port 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y
”), a small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value (A3009). And if the judgment result is not a small hit (A30
The result of 10 is "N"), set the stop symbol information of the loss (A3013), step A3
014 processing is started. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y
”), set a small hit pattern random number check table (A3011), step A143
Stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (A3012) is obtained, and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes effect command setting processing (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (A3017 ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A3018 ), effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure reservation information determination processing is terminated. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). etc.) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the large winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the big winning opening is being processed (result of A3101 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. In addition, if the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the remaining ball processing for the large winning opening is being performed. judge (A3102
).

If the game control device 100 is in the process of the remaining balls in the big winning hole (the result of A3102 is "Y"
), the process proceeds to step A3105. Also, if it is not in the processing of the remaining balls in the big winning mouth (A
It is determined whether the result of 3105 is "N"), and whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", that is, whether it is during small hit processing (A3103). If you are in the middle of a small hit (A310
4 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Also, if it is not during the small hit process (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball is being processed ( A3104). Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number in this way.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit remaining ball processing (the result of A3104 is "N")
, ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the small hit remaining ball is being processed (A31
04 result is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a
) is input (A3106).

The game control device 100, if there is no input to the big winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "
N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (the other big winning slot switch 39a) (A3110). Also, if there is an input to the big winning slot switch 1 (result of A3106 is "Y"), a big winning slot count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107),
A production command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (the other big winning slot switch 39a) (A3110).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "
N"), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). Also, when there is an input to the big winning hole switch 2 (result of A3110 is "Y"), a big winning hole count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and effect command setting processing (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100
) ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the winning counter value is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the large winning hole remaining balls are being processed (A311)
5). If the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (result of A3115 is "Y"), the big winning hole switch monitoring process is finished, and if the big winning hole remaining balls are not being processed (result of A3115 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is in the middle of small hit remaining ball processing (the result of A3116 is "Y")
ends the big winning hole switch monitoring process, and if the minor winning ball remaining process is not in progress (the result of A3116 is "N"), adds the winning counter value (1 or 2) to the big winning hole count number (A31
17), the number of big winning opening count is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9
”), it is determined whether or not it is equal to or more (A3118).

The game control device 100, when the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (A31
18 result is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether it is during small hit processing (A3121).

The game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process if it is not during the small winning process (the result of A3121 is "N"), and if it is during the small winning process (the result of A3121 is "Y
”), save the value of the end of the small winning opening operation in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3122)
, ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3209 If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating a customer waiting demonstration state (a customer waiting demonstration state) is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3211), effect command setting processing is performed (A3212), and "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as a processing number (A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). After that, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variable design discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216)
, End the special figure normal processing.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received The effect control device 300 performs setting to display the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operating handle 24 becomes an off signal.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
”), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3203
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N
”), execute the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number as a production command (A3207
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100)
If there is a second starting memory in the second starting memory, priority control means for executing the variable display game based on the second starting memory preferentially over the variable display game based on the first starting memory.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (special figure 1 here) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 1 variable display game, a variable command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variable pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" relating to special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (A3408), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410), and saves the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). And, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, prepare a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number as a production command,
A production command setting process is performed.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" relating to special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (A3508), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510), and saves the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 indicator 52) (
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360
1), save the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3602). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare (A360
3), the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, a big-hit determination process is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3602 with the big hit information. Save (A3607) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (A
The result of 3606 is "N"), small hit determination processing for determining whether or not it is a small hit according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number matches the small hit determination value is executed (A3608).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (A3
If the result of 609 is "N"), the big-hit flag 1 setting process is finished while the losing information is saved in both the big-hit flag 1 area and the small-hit flag area. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big win", "minor win", and "lose".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A37
01). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3704) is not a big hit (A
If the result of 3705 is "N"), the process of setting the big hit flag 2 is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3605, A3704) will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit judgment values (upper limit judgment value table) corresponding to probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit decision value table defines the upper limit decision value according to the set probability value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (A3802), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3803). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
The result of 3 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A3808), and end the big hit judgment processing.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 803 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state (probability variable state) (A3804). Then, if it is in a high-probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"
), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A3805). On the other hand, if it is not a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value table is used to set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3806).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3807). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A3902). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

The game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3904),
Finish the small hit determination process.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines that the jackpot random number value of the object (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3903). If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), set the deviation as the judgment result (A3904)
. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "
N"), and sets a small hit as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability]
24(A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and small hit determination process (FIG. 23). Each setting (
10 is a table exemplifying each set value).

The example of FIG. 24(A) shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big win probability (when the probability is low and when the probability is high) and the small win probability increase as the set value increases (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more likely the big win occurs, which is advantageous to the player. Incidentally, the jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the value range of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the value range of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value.
In another example, only one of the low-probability jackpot probability and the high-probability jackpot probability may be increased as the set value increases. By changing the big win probability and the small win probability according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24(B), setting 1, 2, 3 (setting value 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6 (setting value 4, 5, 6) big hit probability and small hit probability are the same is set. In settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, the big win probability and the small win probability increase as the set value increases (higher setting). In the example of FIG. 24B, it becomes more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability than in the case of FIG.

In the example of FIG. 24 (C), regardless of the setting (setting value), the probability of a big hit (at low probability and at high probability)
and the small hit probability are the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determination elements.

Other setting determination elements include the probability variable inrush rate (described later), the number of continuations of the general electric support after the end of the jackpot (described later), the number of times the probability variable state continues in the ST machine, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds), Variation pattern of figure variation display game (variation time value), various times set in special figure game processing (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) and the like. If the probability of selecting the predetermined content of these setting discrimination elements is made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001).
, If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), load a big hit design random number from the special figure 1 big hit design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4004). By this process, the type of special result (type of jackpot)
is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4
005), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

In addition, the production mode transition information is information for shifting the production mode. The performance mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and used in the big hit end processing. That is, the performance mode transition information allows the performance mode to be shifted with a big hit as a trigger. In addition, as described above, the production mode transition information is set according to the jackpot stop pattern pattern (probability variable jackpot pattern / normal jackpot pattern, etc.), so the jackpot ends with the type of jackpot pattern (type of jackpot). The shift destination of the production mode that shifts later changes. In addition, since production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above,
The transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether it is in the current special figure high probability state (variable probability state).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and if it is a small hit (
The result of A4011 is "Y"), and the small hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4011). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit pattern table (A4
012), acquire the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number, and save it in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It saves in the stop design pattern area (A4014), and saves the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (A4015). The production mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the production mode can be shifted with the small hit as a trigger. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A40
18).

Also, if the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4016), and the stop design pattern is changed to the stop design pattern. Save it in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the production command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special figure command is the production control device 30
0. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. Clear the pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A40
23), end the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101).
, If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), load a big hit design random number from the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (A4104). The type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected by this process.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4
105), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general electric support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The production mode transition information here is the case of a big hit (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y") and used in the jackpot end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112
).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (A4110
), the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and the decoration special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4113), and production command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special figure command is the production control device 30
0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[Example of special jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying the jackpot pattern allocation (jackpot breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-described special figure game process for each setting.

FIG. 27 exemplifies a jackpot pattern table defining jackpot pattern numbers 1 to 6 (stop pattern numbers) indicating the types of jackpots and their distribution ratios for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern numbers (jackpot types, patterns 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value). be advantageous. In addition, the probability variable entry rate is the ratio of the probability variable jackpot symbols that the probability state after the jackpot ends to a high probability occupies all the symbols.
In addition, the number of times of general electric support after the end of the jackpot, especially for the normal jackpot (the probability state after the end of the jackpot becomes low probability), in settings 1 to 3 or settings 4 to 6, the larger the set value growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (settings 1, 2, 3) and settings 4, 5, 6 (settings 4,
5 and 6), the number of public electric support is set to be the same. In addition, in the ST machine, it is also possible to configure such that the number of times of continuation of the variable probability state increases as the set value increases.

In addition, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of rounds, such as 2R, 6R, and 16R) given for one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. configuration is also possible. In addition, in FIG. 27, for the jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, a larger number of rounds is likely to be given than the jackpot of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is more special. This is more advantageous to the player than the 1-variation display game.

Incidentally, as in FIG. 24(C), it is also possible to make the big hit pattern distribution (big hit breakdown) the same regardless of the setting (setting value).

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (a special figure 1 symbol stop command or a special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the symbol being changed as an effect command (A4701).
, effect command setting processing is executed (A4702). The symbol during variation can be determined from the variation pattern determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). The production control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (decoration special figure 1 variation display game or decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, and a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is 600 in common.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number “2” relating to the processing during special figure display (A4
705), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 to the test signal output data area ( A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 puts the control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) into the pattern confirmation number signal control timer area used when outputting the number of confirmation symbol signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, sets the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 indicator 51 to the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A4711) , To end the process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation.

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 29 shows the symbol variation control processing (A2620, A2622
), symbol variation control processing in the general-purpose game processing, which will be described later. The symbol variation control process includes control of variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and normal symbols (normal symbol) of the variable display game in the variation display section of the batch display device 50, and control of variation of special symbols and normal symbols. This is the process of setting the display data of the design.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the variation control flag for the pattern to be controlled (for example, any one of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in steps A2619, A2621, and A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the flashing control timer, the variation pattern number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( address for stop), display table 1
A (variable) address is defined.

Game control device 100, when the flag during fluctuation applied to the design of the control object is in fluctuation (A
If the result of 7502 is "Y"), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is obtained (A7503). In the case of this embodiment, steps A2619, A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the flashing control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504)
, Determine whether the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (A7505), if the blinking control timer after updating is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled Acquire the corresponding display data (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

Also, if the flashing control timer after updating is 0 (result of A7505 is "Y"), save the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area (A7506), and control target variable pattern number is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable pattern number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the in-varying flag for the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is "N"). (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2
621, the address of the pattern display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

As the flashing control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. This blinking control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 during the variable time.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. In step A7507, when the fluctuation pattern number reaches the upper limit value by updating the fluctuation pattern number by +1, the fluctuation pattern number is set to 0, and the fluctuation pattern number is from 0 to (the fluctuation pattern number upper limit judgment value -1 ) are updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to this variable pattern number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the upper limit determination value of the variable pattern number. is performed, the display is repeated.

By defining the flashing control timer initial value and the variable pattern number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are completed. You can set the number of updates for each game.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled.
Set the display of the normal map, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
is subtracted) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during normal pattern fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 .

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

Further, if the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 Setting of the open time and processing during the normal diagram display, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during the normal diagram per execution (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
result is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y"), and it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705.
If the game state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Effect control device 300 that receives the left-handed instruction notification command
uses the display device 41 or the like to issue a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit left.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control device 100, when the number of normal pattern reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), updates the number of normal pattern reservations by +1 (A
(A
7707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A77
08), extracts the winning design random number, saves it in the winning design random number storage area (A7709), and terminates the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (A770
5 is "N"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. (
Load the per pattern random number from the reservation number 1), and after loading, clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (A7902) . In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904
), if it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 to process.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If not, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

The game control device 100 hits when the random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908)
. Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100, if the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the win information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop design number corresponding to the loaded hit design random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop design number is set. The stop design information is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. Incidentally, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A791
4), save the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7916), clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917
), and the number of reserved charts is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the general pattern game processing timer area (A7
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25
6 for 1500 msec, and 3000 msec for a probability of 16/256. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is terminated. For example, in the process transition setting process during normal pattern fluctuation, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during normal pattern fluctuation, and the process number is saved in the normal pattern game process number area. Then, save the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the general pattern display, in the general pattern flashing control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) in the general pattern fluctuation pattern number area save the

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), set "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal normal processing (A7922),
The process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1311), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), board radio fraud monitoring process (A1316)
Based on the monitoring results in , create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device, or a test fire test device, and perform processing such as setting it in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (
A9501). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"),
Determine whether a body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502)
. If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame open error is occurring (result of A9501 is "Y"), or when a body frame open error is occurring (result of A9502 is "Y"),
The ON data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9507), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102).
When the data stored in the memory is initialized or when the setting change is completed, a predetermined time (for example, 256
msec) is set (A1044, A2419 of main processing). The security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization or the end of setting change. again,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is set by setting key switch 93 or set value change switch 1.
02, etc., the setting variable state (setting change mode) or setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode)
(A1037, A2507 of the main processing), and the probability setting value changing flag is set during setting change (during setting variable state) or probability setting value confirmation mode setting flag is set During the confirmation state, the security signal may be output all the time. Note that when the probability set value changed flag is set (A2414) instead of clearing the probability set value changing flag (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the security signal is output. Terminating configurations are also possible.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9509), and shifts to the processing of step A9510. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). Note that when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). If the radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the radio wave fraud is occurring.

Game control device 100, when board radio fraud is not occurring (result of A9511 is "N")
Furthermore, it is determined whether frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not general electricity fraud is occurring (A9513). If the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the big winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). Incidentally, when a fraudulent winning occurrence flag relating to the large winning opening is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the large winning opening fraud is occurring. If the big winning mouth fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), it is determined whether the switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9515).

When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) is occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), the game control device 100 turns OFF data of the game machine error state signal into a test signal. Save in the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y
”), if board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), if frame radio fraud is occurring (result of A9512 is “Y”), if electricity fraud is occurring ( If the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if fraudulent entrance fraud is occurring (result of A9514 is "Y")
, save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518
). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a starting gate signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting gate (A952
0).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination count control timer for controlling the output time of information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game by -1 if it is not 0 (A9521). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (A9522). If the value of the design determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the design determination count signal is turned off as external information output data. Save the data in the area (A9523) and end the external information editing process.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol decision number of times control timer is not 0 (A952
If the result of step 2 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the pattern determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of collective display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1 to D18
) is a diagram for explaining the light emission mode (lighting/lighting mode).

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state (game state, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutdown before power on. is displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the . For example, even if the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off during the probability setting change. Display units 51 and 5 of display device 50
2 can be displayed. Therefore, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), by a predetermined display in the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game that can be easily visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine 10, the probability setting is being changed, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.

In FIG. 34A, during the probability setting change (during the variable setting state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50, a predetermined A probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as a display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a different display from when the variation is stopped (display different from normal), thereby making the gaming machine 10 unable to play (for example, a variation display game). It can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that it is. It should be noted that, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value (
A2409) and based on the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value,
The output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value are lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). Good (A1603-A1608 of output processing).

It should be noted that the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50, the probability setting value may be lit display or blinking display. Further, both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 may be used to display the probability setting value in a lighting display or a blinking display.

Furthermore, even if the probability setting value is lit or blinked by making the brightness weaker than usual, it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value at a place away from the gaming machine 10. good.

In FIG. 34B, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
), a change-in-progress information display (for example, the letter “P”) is displayed as a predetermined display to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state). In this way, while changing the probability setting,
By performing a different display (a display different from normal) on the first special figure variation display portion 51 from when the variation is stopped, it is possible to clearly indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. In addition, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the character "P") is not used. shall be

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240
1 result is "Y"), the process of generating output data relating to the change-in-progress information display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the change-in-progress The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A of the output process
1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 has a front frame 12 (body frame)
is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y"),
When the probability set value changing flag is set (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51
(LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinking.

In addition, the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be lit or blinked during change. Further, using both the first special figure variation display section 51 and the second special figure variation display section 52, the information display during change may be lit or blinked.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 as the predetermined display. . In this embodiment, the lost result (lost pattern) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display portion 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) lights up.
In this way, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display section 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it is possible to indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but by displaying the losing result (losing pattern) from the probability setting change, the initial data displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 Value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240
1 result is "Y"), the processing for generating output data regarding the display of the result of losing (losing pattern) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10 ), the display of the deviation result may be lit on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). Further, for example, the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y
”), when setting the probability set value changing flag (A1038), the third output port 13
5 and the output data to the fourth output port 136, the display of the deviation result may be lit on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

In addition, the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (LED
The lamp D2) may light up to indicate the result of deviation. In addition, using both the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed.

In FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
), a light-off display is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a display different from that at the time of stopping the fluctuation (display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, it is possible to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the game cannot be played. 10 can be clearly seen in front. In addition, in the stop display at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52, the extinguished display shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100, until the probability set value has been changed from power-on (power restoration) (result of A2406 is "Y"), the first special to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 The output data for the figure fluctuation display section 51 is not generated, and the extinguished display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 .

In addition, the second special figure variation display portion 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be extinguished. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 5
Both 1 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 may be displayed in the off state.

34A to 34D above, during the probability setting change, LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D
18) may be turned off or cyclically turned on to display an animation.

In FIGS. 34E and 34F, during the probability setting change, all display units (that is, all light emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked to display as a predetermined display. , all lighting display or all blinking display are displayed on the collective display device 50 . In this way, during the probability setting change, a different display (
By performing a display that is different from normal, it is possible to clearly indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play.

Note that the all blinking display in FIG. 34F is performed by repeating the all off display and the all on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240
1 result is "Y"), a process for generating output data relating to all lighting display or all blinking display to the third output port 135 and fourth output port 136 is executed, and all lighting display or all blinking display is collectively performed. It may be displayed on the display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1024 is "Y"), sets the probability setting value changing flag. Sometimes (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 to display all lighting display or all blinking display on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1 to D18). .

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A-34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 (
specifications) are displayed. Although the performance display is printed, L
It may be displayed by light emission of an ED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As performance display, display 85 of jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting)
a "1/300 and 1/200", number of prize balls display 85b "3 & 2 & 10 &14", upper limit number of rounds display 85c "2, 6, 16", model (official name) display 85d "CRxxx
xx", display 85e of presence/absence of limit on probability variable jackpot (here, "no limit")
is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variable prize winning device 39 are displayed in order. The limit on the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number of times (a predetermined limit number of hits (number of times in a row) can occur Become).

Since the jackpot probability display 85a at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the collective display device 50. FIG. In addition, the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is set to setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting). Either one (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of jackpot probability (1/300 to 1/200) at the time of low probability may be displayed.

Also, among the jackpot probability at the time of low probability, the LED lamp D1-D of the collective display device 50
Those that cannot be displayed around 18 (jackpot probabilities such as setting 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in an empty area of a member different from the collective display device 50 . In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed in duplicate on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for setting 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed in the upper right, lower left, and upper left empty areas of the game board of FIG. may Alternatively, the jackpot probabilities at low probabilities for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in an empty area within the game area (for example, the surface of the lower left general prize winning opening 35). In addition, the display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit for the variable probability big win displays "with limit" only when there is a limit, and when there is no limit, nothing needs to be displayed. In this way, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the collective display device 50
The items displayed as the performance display around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the round number upper limit value at the time of the big hit is displayed in another area or the display device 41, etc. Some or all items displayed as performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during setting change, setting confirmation, and/or during customer waiting. . The effect control device 300 stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability in advance (program ROM
321, etc.). In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. Switching the display of the jackpot probability of each setting is the production button 2
It may be executed by operating an operation unit such as 5 or a cross key.

35 (A) and (B) show a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6) is displayed, a configuration is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the game machine 10. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from an oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 while the probability setting is being changed.

In FIG. 35(A), two recessed portions 51a and 51b (recessed portions) are provided on the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure is provided in the recessed portions 51a and 51b, respectively. A variable display section 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35(B), an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure variation display portion 51 and the second special figure variation display portion 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50 . This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure variation display portion 51 or the second special figure variation display portion 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 36
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 uses an RTC (real time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
38 is executed to read time information (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, when power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003 and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 replaces with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any one of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, . . . ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time at a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long time interval decreases as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing lots for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and sound volume by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. By drawing lots for the value (additional value) to be added to the performance points with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the added value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large additional value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) composed of LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as electric accessories driven by motors and solenoids (B002
1). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0021. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the reception command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
]), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special design, and there is a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process of FIG. 42). and,
If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). It should be noted that the jackpot system command is a command to command the operation (display of the fanfare screen, round screen, etc.) related to the performance during the jackpot. middle processing), an interval command (set during the big winning mouth opening process), an ending command (set during the big winning mouth opening process), and the like. Then, if the MODE part indicates a big hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), execute the big hit command process (B1
208), and terminates the received command analysis process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a big hit system command (B1
The result of 207 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the pattern-based command (
B1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes the look-ahead stop symbol command (see FIG. 15
A3014). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead pattern command (B
The result of 1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). The look-ahead variation commands include the look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216
), and terminates the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and single-shot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then the MODE part decorates the special figure 1 reservation number command (A2917
, A3207) (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Production control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE part is the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (A2
917, A3203) is represented (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud occurs), fraud cancellation command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud is canceled), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a state ON command, the glass frame open detection switch 63
There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal from (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command. (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the number of out-balls reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
1319 result is "N"), then the MODE part is a count command (A3107, A3
111 large winning opening count command) is determined (B1321). and,
If the MODE part indicates a count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command for recovery from power failure in 1035 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change instruction command (A1
029), a command for changing the probability setting (A1041), a command for changing the probability setting value (A2
415), and a command (A2421) for ending probability setting change. If the MODE part indicates a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, the setting change information setting process displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display prompting the player to change the setting.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). The setting confirmation commands include, for example, a probability setting value confirming command (A2508) and a probability setting value confirmation end command (A2512). and mods
If the E part indicates a setting confirmation type command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation type information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the symbol stop command includes, for example, a special figure 1 symbol stop command and a special figure 2 symbol stop command. Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process executed by 0. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag indicating that the look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing executed by .0.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. When waiting to receive a read-ahead variation command (the result of B1701 is "
Y"), and clears the read-ahead variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), load the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area (B1711), and execute the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold preview effect (hold change notice) is generated (B1713). If the latest pending pre-reading preview effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice) is the effect to start immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading advance notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending pre-reading forewarning effect does not occur (B171
The result of 3 is "N"), or if the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (
If the result of B1715 is "N"), leave it as is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the symbol types are the missing symbols, the 2R probability variable jackpot symbols (2R-A1, etc.) shown in FIG. 27, and the 2R normal jackpot symbols (2
R-A2 etc.), 6R variable jackpot pattern (6R-A1 etc.), 6R normal jackpot pattern (6R-A2
etc.), 16R variable jackpot pattern (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal jackpot pattern (16R-A2
etc.).

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and the number of times of the read-ahead effect of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of times of the continuous notice effect) is not 0 -1 updated (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 43) described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable production setting process executed by the production control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B200
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and a first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, the setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the second half advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2007), and the variable command The address of the second half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, for example, according to the content of the variable effect such as the ready-to-win effect and the notice effect, stop symbol setting processing for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed (B20
12). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display settings for variable effects such as reach effects (B2013
), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (B2014). Subsequently, the hold decrease corresponding to the special figure type (
Hold shift) display setting is performed, for example, a display that reduces the hold display corresponding to the decoration special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Next, set the audio number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker, and the decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device (B
2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

It should be noted that the voice number and decoration number can be set not only based on the content of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to a set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can select from the lighting mode of the decoration device, that is, the lighting mode of the decoration light-emitting portion (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of .

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017), in addition to the above-described first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). note that,
The fourth pattern variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED).

[Jackpot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the jackpot command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the jackpot command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the jackpot command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
Fanfare is set in the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (B210
4 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and indicates the current game state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state). The game status flag is set to indicate that the round is in progress (B2105, B2106), and the big win system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates an interval ( B2107). If the MODE part represents an interval (B21
If the result of 07 is "Y"), that is, if the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10. Set the game state flag to be in interval (B2108, B2109
), ending the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not indicate an interval (B210
If the result of 7 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates the ending (B2110). If the MODE part represents the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is "Y"), that is, if the jackpot command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current game state of the gaming machine 10 Ending is set to the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the big win system command processing is terminated.

In addition, if the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not indicate the ending (B
If the result of 2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit command process without executing any process.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies a starting condition (for example, winning a starting winning hole)
Game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on
and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102) can change the setting regarding the game condition (or the setting regarding the game) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a variable setting state in which settings can be changed when power is turned on to the gaming machine 10, and when power is turned off before shifting to the variable setting state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game that is easy to see from the front of the gaming machine 10,
It can be suggested that 0 is a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.
In addition, even in the setting variable state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power shutdown is maintained, and the normal display (losing pattern, big hit pattern) etc. at the time of stopping the fluctuation is displayed on the display unit for the special figure fluctuation display game. Then, for example, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
There is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the player is ready to play.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) performs a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition.
2) can be displayed. The gaming machine 10 includes this light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting parts of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (Fig. 34F)
.

Therefore, in the variable setting state (during setting change), the display device (collective display device 50) displays a different display than usual, so that the gaming machine 10 can be clearly displayed in front of the gaming machine 10 in a state in which the game cannot be played. .

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information suggesting that the setting variable state is in the variable setting state (during setting change) on the display unit (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display It may be displayed on the part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (during setting change), the game machine 10 is notified that the game machine 10 is in a state in which it cannot play by displaying a display different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game.
can be clearly seen in front of the

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 5 in the setting variable state (during setting change)
2) may be extinguished (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (during setting change), the display unit for the variable display game displays a display different from the normal display (a display different from that when the variable display game is stopped).
It is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the game machine 10 that the is in a state in which the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, , 1st special figure fluctuation display section 51 or 2nd special figure fluctuation display section 52) may be displayed (Fig. 34C).

Therefore, by displaying a predetermined display on the variable display game display section in the variable setting state (during setting change), it is possible to indicate in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) during the setting change, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game can be changed to the initial state when the setting change is completed. No need to set the value.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The first embodiment relates to a look-ahead effect of the chance (a look-ahead notice of the chance) by a losing symbol. A chance lottery, which is a specific stop result mode (specific losing stop pattern mode) of a decoration special figure variation display game, can be drawn or selected according to a set value (probability set value), and the set value is suggested or notified by the chance number. to enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Stop symbol setting processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44) when executing the special figure variation display game.
It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the stop design setting process (B2012) executed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special symbol variation display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the received variation command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is "Y"), the big hit stop pattern ("2
, 2, 2”, etc.) is selected (B2302).

When the special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 sets the number of times of the look-ahead effect (remaining number of times of the continuous effect) of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous notice effect to 0. It is determined whether or not there is (B2303). When the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is "Y"), step B2308
to process. In addition, the initial value of the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous notice effects) is the expectation of the prefetch target hold jackpot, that is, the special figure fluctuation display game executed by the prefetch target hold. can be set.

Effect control device 300, when the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is "N"), the chance stop symbol mode (chance mode, lost symbol group) is the prefetch target. It is set according to the degree of expectation of the pending jackpot (B2304). The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode in which a set value cannot be suggested or reported, a special mode in which a set value can be suggested (set value suggestion mode), and a confirmed mode in which a set value can be definitely reported. (setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in a special figure variation display game related to the hold (starting memory) of the look-ahead target, the chance eye stop pattern mode is set to a normal mode, and a special 2 reach (SP2 reach) is generated. can be set to a special mode when , and can be set to a definite mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, the expected degree (expected value) of the big hit is in the order of SP1 reach<SP2 reach<SP3 reach, so the chance stop symbol mode can be set according to the expected degree of the reserved big hit of the look-ahead object. note that,
Conversely, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the prefetch target, the chance stop symbol mode is set to the normal mode, and when SP2 reach occurs, it is set to the special mode, and SP3 reach. may be set to the definite mode when occurs.

As described above, by setting the chance stop symbol mode corresponding to the ready-to-win type (system of ready-to-win production) of the prefetch target hold, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set according to the expectation of the prefetch target hold jackpot. can be set. Therefore, according to the chance stop symbol mode, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch object as the prefetch effect. In addition, the reach type that occurs in the special figure variation display game related to the hold of the lookahead target is the lookahead variation command (B121
It can be seen from the content of the look-ahead variation pattern command and variation effect (B2010) as 5).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting-related effect) for suggesting or notifying a set value (B2305). When the chance stop symbol mode is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is "N"), the lost symbol mode (lost symbol group) of the normal mode is lost and stopped regardless of the set value. lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process is terminated. When the chance stop symbol mode is a special mode or a fixed mode, and the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2305 is "Y"), if it is a special mode, from the special mode lost symbol mode (lost symbol group) A lost stop pattern is selected by lottery probability according to the set value, and if it is a fixed mode, a lost stop pattern is fixed (determined) from the lost pattern mode (loose pattern group) of the fixed mode according to the set value (B2307). .

Effect control device 300, when the number of times of look-ahead effect (remaining number of times of continuous notice effect) is 0 (the result of B2303 is "Y"), executes the setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) to suggest or notify the setting value. It is determined whether or not to do so (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery,
It may be determined to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (B2308
(B2309), the result is "N"). When the setting suggesting effect is to be executed (the result of B2308 is "Y"), a deviated stop symbol is drawn with a drawing probability according to the set value (B2310). In this way, even if the number of prefetch effects (remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is 0 and the chance prefetch effects are not executed (the result of B2303 is "Y"), the setting suggestion effect is performed independently of the chance prefetch effects. can run.

Note that the processing from steps B2308 to B2310 is optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop pattern mode]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the chance stop symbol mode in the chance look-ahead effect. The chance eye stop symbol mode includes a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a fixed mode (setting notification mode).

In the lost pattern mode (lost pattern group) of the normal mode, for example, "2, 4, 6" (blue), "1, 5, 9" (green), "3, 7, 7" (red) There is a stop pattern. For example, "2, 4, 6" (green),
There are "1, 5, 9" (red) and "3, 7, 7" (blue) stop symbols. The lost pattern mode (lost pattern group) of the confirmed mode has no relation to the color, "○, 1, 1", "○, 2,
2", "O, 3, 3", "O, 4, 4", "O, 5, 5", and "O, 6, 6". In addition, ◯ indicates an arbitrary pattern different from the two aligned patterns (coordinates) in the middle and right of the three decoration identification patterns (identification information) in the left and right.

It should be noted that the disconnection stop pattern of the confirmation mode (setting notification mode) has colors and shapes that are not used in the normal mode and the special mode (for example, gold and rainbow colors other than blue, green, and red) and shapes. You can separate them for ease of use.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (distribution rate) in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is set to the same value regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting when one losing stop symbol of the normal mode is selected is the same (100/6≈17%).
becomes. The probability in FIG. 47 is the degree of expectation of each set value that the player can guess when a specific losing and stopping symbol is displayed. Therefore, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the setting value, that is, the mode in which the setting value cannot be suggested or notified. In addition, Fig. 47
In the example of , the selection rate of the normal mode lost stop symbol in one lottery is 100/
3 (≈33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is determined to be different depending on the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probabilities (expectations) of each setting when one stop pattern of the special mode is selected are different (some settings may be the same).
. Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the setting value, that is, a mode in which the setting value can be suggested.

In the fixed mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each lost stop symbol is set to 100% for only one predetermined setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
When one out of stop pattern is selected, the probability (expectation degree) of one predetermined setting is 10
0%, and the probability (expectation), which is another setting, becomes 0%. Therefore, the definite mode is a mode in which the player can recognize the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be definitely notified.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification patterns in the special mode can suggest set values by having specific colors. For example, the off-stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode is
Can't suggest setting value. However, the lost stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode and the lost stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (green) in the special mode are the same in number part but different in color,
By having a particular color (green), the setpoint can be suggested. It should be noted that the three decoration identification patterns of the special mode may suggest the set value by having a specific shape.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of selecting a chance eye stop symbol mode (chance eye mode, lost symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance stop symbol mode is set by lottery with different selection rates (distribution rates) depending on whether the special figure variation display game related to the reservation of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 48 as well, in the example of FIG. 48, as a look-ahead effect, the chance eye stop symbol mode is set to correspond to the ready-to-win type of pre-reading object suspension. You can let us know your expectations. It should be noted that whether the reservation of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss depends on the symbol type (B18
02).

As shown in FIG. 48(A), the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of normal mode<special mode<fixed mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the degree of expectation of the big hit of the reservation of the prefetch target may be increased in the order of fixed mode<special mode<normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48(B), the confirmation mode or the special mode is selected, and even if the player recognizes that the expectation of the pending jackpot of the prefetch target is low, the setting (set value) is confirmed by the confirmation mode. The player is not discouraged because the game is notified in a timely manner.

In addition, if the selection rate of the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode in FIG. It is the same as setting the normal mode, the special mode, and the definite mode corresponding to the occurrence of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach.

It should be noted that the number of jackpots from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 and the start of the game, the number of consecutive jackpots from the start of the jackpot to returning to the normal game state (the number of consecutive wins), and the operating time of the gaming machine 10 increase. A configuration that increases the selection rate of the definite mode is also possible. Since the fixed mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance stop symbol mode is associated with the expectation level of the reserved jackpot of the look-ahead object, and the chance stop symbol mode (especially the special mode, the confirmed mode) is drawn at a probability corresponding to the set value. can. As a result, the losing stop pattern is drawn with a probability (selection rate) according to the result of the special figure variation display game (big win or loss) related to the reservation of the prefetch target and the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the second embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decoration special figure variation display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is being executed in the variable display area 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are displayed respectively. number "0" is displayed.

The suspension display portion 630 (starting memory display portion) includes a first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first starting memory as a first suspension display (first starting memory display), and a second starting memory as a second suspension display (second starting memory display). 2 starting memory display). First pending display portion 630a
, two pending displays 633 are displayed as the first pending display. At present, the pending display 633 is not displayed in the second pending display portion 630b. Also, the reserved digestion region 64 in the rectangular frame
0 is displayed in the bottom center of the display screen. Suspension display 633a during fluctuation indicating the suspension related to the special figure variation display game being executed (starting memory that has become the execution right of this special figure variation display game)
Displayed in pending digestion area 640 .

After that, in (a), a hold (first start memory) occurs due to the winning of the start prize opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the hold that has occurred changes from the normal mode to the mode ( color) has changed to a pending display. Then, a chance-first look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the occurrence of a hold with a high expectation of a big hit as a look-ahead target hold (B1712, B1716). In addition, it increases to the number "3" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650.

Then, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game is finished, and the first chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the lost stop pattern "2, 4, 6" (blue) in the normal mode. . Here, all or part of the lost stop symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. In addition, when the decoration special figure fluctuation display game ends, the pending display 633a during fluctuation is erased. In the normal mode, the player cannot guess the settings (set values).

After that, in (d), the next decoration special figure variation display game is being executed. While the pending display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), the first pending display portion 630a is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.
is moved. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "2".

Then, in (E), the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is over, and the second chance look-ahead effect is a special mode (setting suggestion mode) of the stop pattern "1, 5, 9" (red) Executed on display. Here, all or part of the losing and stopping symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. A setting (setting value) is suggested by the stop symbol of the special mode, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (according to FIG. 47, setting 4 is highly probable).

After that, in (F), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. While the pending display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), the first pending display portion 630a is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.
is moved. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "1".

Then, in (G) of FIG. 49B, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is over, and the third chance look-ahead effect is the stop pattern "1, 6, 6" of the fixed mode (set notification mode). Executed on display. Here, all or part of the losing and stopping symbols may be blinked so as to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (set value) is definitely notified by the deviating stop symbol of the determined mode, and the player can recognize the setting (set value) (setting 6 is determined according to FIG. 47).

In addition, in the case of the confirmed mode, a dialogue 635 may be displayed as a character image. The line 635 is selected according to the setting (set value) determined by the deviating stop symbol of the determination mode. For example, when setting 6 (set value 6) is confirmed with the lost stop symbol "○, 6, 6" as in (G), "Congratulations!" , 1” and the setting 1 (setting value 1) is confirmed, “Unfortunate” may be displayed.

After that, in (h), the next decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed by holding the look-ahead target. As pending display 633 moves to the right (pending shift), pending digestion area 640
, the pending display 633 (black) of the prefetch target at the right end of the first pending display portion 630a moves to . In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is reduced to "0".

After that, in (vii), the decoration special figure variation display game is finished, the suspended display during variation 633a is erased, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed. And in (ko),
A big win round starts as a special game state.

Regarding the above screen transition, even in the special mode of (e) in FIG. 49A, dialogue as a character image may be displayed. The lines may be selected according to the special aspect stop symbols. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting by combining words and a special aspect stop symbol. For example, in the combination of the lost stop symbol "1, 5, 9" (red) and the line "Congratulations!"
, 9” (red) and the dialogue “Unfortunate” may be set to have a high probability of setting 1 (set value 1).

Further, with regard to the screen transition in FIG. 49, only when the lost stop pattern in the confirmed mode is displayed, the whole or part of the lost stop pattern may be flashed conspicuously. Furthermore, Fig. 49
Although the chance stop symbol mode in the third chance look-ahead effect is different each time, the chance stop symbol mode may be the same each time. And this same aspect
It may be determined according to the degree of expectation of the big hit of the hold of the prefetch target.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the start condition (for example, wins a prize in a start prize opening)
Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) for variably displaying a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) on the display device 41 based on the variable display game When the stop result mode becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102) can change the setting (set value) regarding the game conditions. The starting memory means (for example, the game control device 100) can store a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the starting condition. Prior determination means (for example, game control device 100) determines execution information (for example, variation display game result, variation pattern, etc.) is determined before the variation display game based on the start memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), when the stop result mode of the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) does not become the special result mode (jackpot result mode), By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a fixed mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect (chance look-ahead effect, chance look-ahead notice) based on the determination result of the advance determination means. Furthermore, production control means (production control device 300)
can execute a setting-related effect (setting-suggestion effect) for suggesting or notifying a setting (setting value) using the specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a fixed mode).

Therefore, in the notice effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, it is possible to suggest or notify the setting (set value), so that the player can set (set value) as well as guess whether it will be a big hit or not. can also be estimated, and it is possible to prevent the announcement effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved. Furthermore, in the announcement effect, even when the degree of expectation for a big win is low, the player has more fun guessing the setting (set value), and the interest in the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting-related production by having a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) of a specific stop result mode have a specific color. . Therefore, the player also pays attention to the color of the identification information (decorative special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest in the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300), a plurality of identification information (loss stop pattern) of a specific stop result mode (for example, special mode, definite mode), the specific stop result mode Select when executing the derived variable display game (Figs. 43, 44, and 46)
. Therefore, a plurality of pieces of identification information (loss stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of the preliminary determination, thereby reducing the burden of processing (control) at the time of the preliminary determination.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54 . Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of game machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

A game control device 100 (main board) for overall control of the game via a switch base 738 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 , and the game control device 100 is controlled via a control base 733 above the switch base 738 . A production control device 300 is provided for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the production control command (production command) transmitted from. Behind the production control device 300, a protective cover 737 covering the back surface of the production control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100
is provided. When the game board 30 configured as described above is stored in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the game board 30 protrude behind the front frame 12. do.

A storage unit 750, which stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility, aligns the stored game balls and causes them to flow down, is provided on the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12.
is arranged. A payout unit 790 for paying out game balls falling from the storage unit 750 to the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12 .

In addition, on the lower back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24. A ball shooting device 742 that shoots, a connection terminal 743 that connects to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices are provided.

In addition, on the lower part of the back surface of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button switch) of a setting change device 42 (setting change means) capable of changing settings related to game conditions are provided. , button switches) and a 7-segment type probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp) are provided. As described above, the setting key switch 93, the set value change switch 102, and the probability set value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10, and cannot be operated (accessed) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting change device 42 and cannot confirm the display of the probability set value display device 143 . Also, the setting key switch 93, the set value change switch 102, and the probability set value display device 143 are
Since they are provided inside, they are not hidden (overlapped) by the initial actions of the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a, which will be described later.

The probability set value display device 143 may be provided at a position where it is not hidden during the initial action of the internal accessories 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, and may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30, for example. In addition, when the probability setting value is displayed so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, the display device (LED lamp) or the like of the batch display device 50 may be used as the probability setting value display device 143, and the display device 41 may be used as the probability set value display device 143 . Furthermore, even if the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30, it is preferable that it is invisible to the player and visible only to the operator. For example, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible by the operator performing a specific operation on the effect button 25 . Also, the display of the probability set value display device 143 may be made visible by the player using a special member (for example, a polarizing filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting change device 42 is made accessible when the front frame 12 is opened. It may be made operable.

78A may be used as the probability set value display device 143, and the probability set value display device 143 may be used as the state display device. When using the 152 character ratio display units 68, four 7-segment types (8-segment types including dots) of the character ratio display units 68 are displayed during setting change or setting confirmation.
Any one of the indicators 900 (for example, the leftmost or rightmost indicator 900) may display the set probability value. Note that the character product ratio is displayed in the character product ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the character product ratio display section 68 can be used for both the display of the character product ratio and the display of the set value.

Also, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93 . By providing the cover member in this manner, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 93 from being operated by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who commits fraud, thereby enhancing the crime prevention effect. moreover,
When a cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether the cover member covers the setting key switch 93 or not. By inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. . For example, when the front frame 12 is closed and the cover member does not cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 notifies the error to the display device 41 or the speaker 19.
, LEDs, lamps, etc., it is possible to take countermeasures against crime and fraud.

[Production control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to Drawing 51, composition of production control device 300 (sub board) concerning a 3rd embodiment is explained. FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the production control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4).

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46.
and a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.).
In addition, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and controls the frame effect device 9 provided on the glass frame 15.
5 is driven and controlled.

As shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the board effect device 44 includes internal accessories 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect, and a motor (not shown).

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

The internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is housed in the back of the center case 40 so as not to be visually recognized by the player, and is positioned in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the upper side of the display device 41. . On the internal accessory 44a, the characters "Geki-netsu" are drawn to indicate that the expectation of a big win is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is positioned in front of the display device 41 and covers the lower left side of the display device 41 by moving. In addition, the internal accessory 44b is drawn with the character "♪" to indicate that the expectation of a big hit is high. A sound may be generated from a speaker along with the moving operation of the internal accessory 44b.

In addition, the effect control device 300, in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 of FIG. I can suggest. And the player will have more fun guessing the setting value,
Increased interest in gaming.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (outer movable member) that cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame effect device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open portion) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95 is housed inside the glass frame 15 so as not to be visually recognized by the player, and when the frame effect device 95 is driven, it becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15. protrude. A character 95b is drawn on the external accessory 95a to notify that the expectation of a big win is high. Note that the frame rendering device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, and the front frame 1
2 may be provided.

In addition, the effect control device 300 can suggest the set value by drawing the external accessory 95a with a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value and operating it in the advance notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. . Then, the player will have more fun guessing the set value, and the interest in the game will be improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable body control circuit 334a.

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of movable body control processing according to the third embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B3001). In addition, it is good also as determining whether it is at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined that the effect control device 300 is not at the time of turning on the power (the result of B3001 is "
N"), the normal control process is started according to the content of the effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) (B3003). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the power is turned on (the result of B3001 is "Y"), it determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting is received (B3002).

A command during probability setting change is judged to have been received when the MODE part indicates a setting change system (result of B1325 is "Y") in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39). be done. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is pressed.
is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is "Y"), the command during the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B
1041). By pressing the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 during the probability setting change, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value related to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 .

Effect control device 300, when it is determined that it has received a command during probability setting change (result of B3002 is "Y"), determines whether it has received a command to end the probability setting change ( B3004).

When the probability setting change end command indicates the setting change system (the result of B1325 is "Y") in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39), the probability setting change end command
determined to be received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
(result of A2416 is "Y"), the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2416 is "Y"), a command to end the probability setting change is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 30
0 (A2421).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command during the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3002 is "N"), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the body frame open error It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state-on command indicating a body frame open error (front frame open error) is received as an error/illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame open error is occurring.

When it is determined that the effect control device 300 has received a command to end the probability setting change (
If the result of B3004 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not a body frame open error is occurring (B3006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control device 300 has not received the command to end the probability setting change (the result of B3004 is "N"
), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, only the internal accessories 44a and 44b start the initial operation control process (B3005).

In the initial operation control process (B3005) for the internal role products 44a and 44b, for example, the motors that move the internal role products 44a and 44b of the board effect device 44 are respectively driven to control the internal role products 44a and 44b. is moved forward of the display device 41, control is performed to move it to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, after the initial operation control of the internal role product 44a is completed, the initial operation control of the internal role product 44b is performed. In this way, the internal accessory 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are executed in order. Similarly, when another internal accessory other than the internal accessories 44a and 44b is attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is executed in order. The initial operation control of the internal role product 44a and the initial operation control of the internal role product 44b may be executed in parallel.

Production control device 300, when it is determined that the body frame open error is occurring (the result of B3006 is "Y"), that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is open, the internal accessories Only 44a and 44b start initial operation control processing (B3005). In this way, the effect control device 300, when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal roles 44a and 44b, It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial movement of the object 95a so as not to execute it.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main frame open error is not occurring (B3
006 is "N"), that is, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed, the regulation of the initial movement of the external role 95a is released, and the internal role 44a, 44b and the external role 95a are released. object 95a
is started (B3007).

In the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal role products 44a, 44b and the external role product 95a, the internal role products 44a, 44b of the board effect device 44 perform initial operation control similar to the processing of B3005. In the external role 95a of the frame effect device 95, the motor for moving the external role 95a is driven to project the external role 95a from the upper side of the glass frame 15 (open portion). Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). Thus, the effect control device 300 functions as control means for controlling the actions of the internal roles 44a and 44b and the external role 95a. When another external role different from the external role 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external role 95a and the initial operation control of the other external role are executed in order.

In addition, in the initial action control process (B3007) for the internal role products 44a, 44b and the external role product 95a, the time required for the initial action control of the internal role products 44a, 44b, which have a large number of movable roles, is greater than that of the external role product 95a. is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of It should be noted that regardless of the number of movable roles, even if the internal roles 44a and 44b have a plurality of presentation modes and the actions are complicated, the time required for the initial motion control of the internal roles 44a and 44b is greater than that of the external role. It is longer than the time required for the initial motion control of the object 95a. Also, the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (
between the opening part) (for example, an intermediate position between the internal accessories 44a, 44b and the external accessory 95a),
For example, when a movable accessory that moves toward the center of the gaming machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial motion control for the movable accessory in the same manner as for the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body) is open, the initial action of the movable accessory is regulated in the same manner as the initial action of the external accessory 95a and is not executed.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) is open, the initial action of the external role product 95a is regulated so that it is not executed. (movable member) only the initial movement of the whole, that is, without executing the initial movement of the entire external accessory 95a,
Operation mode (for example, vibration, swing, etc.) of the movable member (second effect section, second movable member, character 95b) of the external role object 95a other than the initial action, and light-emitting member (second effect section, second movable member) ) (for example, the eyes (LEDs) of the character 95b emit light) may be executable. That is, such a second effect section can switch the effect mode to the initial mode in the initial state before executing the predetermined action (normal action) of the second effect section. By doing so, even when the initial action of the first effect section is restricted and not executed, the external accessory 95a can be placed inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion). can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to Drawing 54A and Drawing 54B, timing of initial operation control processing of production control device 300 concerning a 3rd embodiment is explained. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 6
4 (body frame open detection switch) is turned on, the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. In addition, before the power is turned on, the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, but the game control device 100 and the like are not in operation. The value changing flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Also, an initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial action of the external accessory 95a is regulated and is not executed.

By setting the probability set value changing flag in the main process (FIG. 5B) (A1038)
, is turned on, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (A2505) by the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11), thereby being turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2 in FIG. 11
508). In addition, when the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state ON command indicating a body frame open error (front frame open error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the operator finishes changing the probability set value at time T2 (A2414, A24 in FIG. 10
15), the probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.
In the embodiment, it is assumed that the probability setting value changing flag is turned off and the probability setting value checking mode flag is turned on by completing the change of the probability setting value. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value checking mode flag may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial action control process for the internal role product 44a is completed, and the initial action control process for the internal role product 44b is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In this embodiment, the time required for the initial action (initial action time) of the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a is the same, but may be different. For example, the initial action time of the internal role objects 44a and 44b, which tend to have complicated motion modes, is set to the external role object 9
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. In addition, the production control device 300 increases the speed of the initial operation of the internal accessories 44a and 44b by increasing the motor output, thereby allowing the internal accessories 44a and 44
The initial action time of b may be shorter than the initial action time of the external accessory 95a.

By closing the front frame 12 (body frame) at time T4, the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204 ) is an error/illegal command in the effect control device 300
sent to. Then, the regulation of the initial action of the external role product 95a is released, and the initial action control process of the external role product 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). Thus, in the initial operation control process of this embodiment, when the front frame 12 is open, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is not executed.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial action control process of the internal accessory 44b ends. Thus, in the initial operation control processing of this embodiment, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is
It is started prior to the initial action control process of the external role product 95a and ends before the initial action control process of the external role product 95a.

After that, at time t3, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a ends, and the game machine 1
You can now play with 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. In the comparative example, the probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 are also set from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control process of the third embodiment. turned on and off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. Control processing is executed. Therefore, the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example
is started at the same timing (time T4).

After that, at time t3, when the initial operation control processing of the internal role product 44a and the external role product 95a is completed, the initial operation control processing of the internal role product 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time when the gaming machine 10 becomes ready for playing according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

Then, at time t4, the initial action control process of the internal accessory 44b ends, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also be played. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time at which the game becomes available is later than that of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

Note that the internal accessory 44a, 44b of the present embodiment executes the initial operation control process when the power is turned on at time T1, but when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, the external accessory 95a
An internal accessory may be provided for executing the initial operation control process at the same timing as the . For example, the operation mode of movable members (internal accessories) that affect the game, such as the opening/closing door 39c of the big winning opening and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. teeth,
After the set value is set, the initial operation control process may be executed in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. By executing the initial operation control process after setting the set values in this way, the movable members that affect the game (the opening and closing door 39c of the large winning opening, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to check whether the V winning opening (the movable member that opens and closes the predetermined area) normally operates according to the operation mode of the set value. In addition, the V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning device that may be provided in the special variable winning device 39, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening, notification of V winning is performed and the jackpot ends. Later definite variable state (high probability state, specific game state, one of the predetermined game state) is determined. In addition, the initial movement control processing of the movable member that affects such a game is
It may be executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4, but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. Furthermore, the initial motion control process for the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

Also, the command during probability setting change opens the front frame 12 (body frame) (A1 in FIG. 5A
023 or A1027 result is "Y"), the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028 result is "Y"), the game control device 1
00 to the production control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but regardless of the open state of the front frame 12, even if it is sent by turning on the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 good. Furthermore, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed may be transmitted at the timing when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on, or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the probability setting changing command is sent). State) A setting variable state in which the probability setting value can be changed may be set, and furthermore, in this setting variable state, a probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be set so that the probability setting value can be confirmed. Then, when the probability set value confirmation mode flag is set, the actions of both the internal role products 44a and 44b and the external role product 95a may be regulated so that they are not executed, or they may be returned to their initial positions. . Note that, in the same way as when the probability setting changing command of the present embodiment is transmitted, when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44a and 44b is executed. On the other hand, the initial action of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
A game machine 10 having an openable frame (for example, a glass frame 15 or a front frame 12 (main body frame)) on which a game board 30 having a game area 32 according to the third embodiment is arranged, has a predetermined opening inside the frame. and an outer movable member (external role 95a) that performs a predetermined action outside the frame, and changes settings related to the game when a predetermined condition is established. Possible setting change means (setting change device 42) and control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are provided. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and can change the settings when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. When it is in the state, the initial movement of the inner movable member can be executed without executing the initial movement of the outer movable member.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the control means (the production control device 300) is in a state in which the settings can be changed (for example, the setting changing means is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is on) or when the frame is open), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame when operating the setting change means or opening and closing the frame, and the initial operation of the movable member can be appropriately performed in the game machine. can run to

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying setting values corresponding to game-related settings. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable members (internal accessories 44a and 44b) and the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being hidden by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, thereby suppressing the interruption of the operator's operation. can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (effect control device 300) cancels the regulation on the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed ends. make it possible. According to such a game machine 10, when operating the setting change means,
When the frame is opened and closed, the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (rendering control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial action of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). Initial actions of the role objects 44a, 44b) are executed. According to the game machine 10, the initial motion of the inner movable member, which takes a long time to control the initial motion, is started during the probability setting change, and the initial motion of the outer movable member, which takes a short time to control the initial motion, It is started by closing the frames (front frame 12, body frame) after the completion of the probability setting change. Therefore, compared to the case where the initial operations of the inner movable member and the outer movable member are started at the same time after the frame is closed, the initial operation of the inner movable member, which takes time, can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. can shorten the time to

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (the performance control device 300) determines whether the setting changing means (the setting changing device 42) is operated even when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Alternatively, when the frame (front frame 12, body frame) is open, it is provided with a regulation means (effect control device 300) that regulates the initial movement of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). According to such a game machine 10, since the outer movable member does not move while the probability setting is being changed or when the frame is open, it is possible to suppress the outer movable member from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

Also, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening portion (glass frame 15) attached to the body portion (front frame 12, body frame) so as to be openable and closable. The gaming machine 10 includes a first effect section (external role 95a, first movable member) that executes a predetermined action outside the open section, and setting change means (setting A change device 42) and a control means (a production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first production unit. The first rendering section has a second rendering section (character 95b, second movable member) capable of switching rendering modes in an initial state before executing a predetermined action (normal action). When the game machine 10 is powered on, the control means can execute the initial mode of the second effect section and the initial operation of the first effect part, and change the settings when the game machine 10 is powered on. If it is in the state of enabling, the first
The initial mode of a second performance part can be executed without executing the initial operation of the performance part. According to the gaming machine 10, the second effect section (the character 95b, the second movable member), which is unlikely to contact the operator or interfere with the frame, is replaced with the first effect section (the external character 95a, the second movable member). 1 movable member) can be initialized in an initial mode prior to the initial operation.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Processing when setting value is received]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the above-described one-shot command processing (FIG. 39) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the setting value reception processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not a normal command (the result of B4001 is "N"), the set value reception processing is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B4001 is "Y"), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). Then, the effect control device 300 draws lots for the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value in order to perform the setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value by the predetermined light emitting unit (B4003). . The predetermined light emitting part is
For example, in the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is
It becomes a setting determination element that allows the player to estimate the setting (setting value). In addition, the predetermined light-emitting part (effect device) is not limited to the projecting effect unit 13, but the lighting member capable of emitting light (the frame decoration device 18, the decoration device 22, the board decoration device 46, the big prize opening LED 39d, etc.) and the display device 41 display screen can be used.

[Lottery table for initial light emission mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selectivity of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect that the effect control device 300 draws upon receiving the set value will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining the initial lighting mode (initial color determination) of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. The selection rate and selectable types change.

First, the fact that the types of selectable initial colors change according to the received setting values will be described. When the received setting values are settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as the initial color, if setting 5, both green and red can be selected, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. be possible. Therefore, if the initial color of the predetermined light-emitting portion of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player sets the setting to 4 or more; if it is red, the setting is 5 or more; 6 can be estimated.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery changes according to the received set value.

When the received setting value is setting 1, the selection rate of white as the initial color is 80%, the selection rate of blue is 15%, and the selection rate of yellow is 5%. The selection rate of white as the initial color is set to 75% for setting 2, 70% for setting 3, and so on, so that the selection rate decreases as the received setting value increases. . In this embodiment, the white selection rate is set to decrease in increments of 5% each time the received setting value increases by one. may be set to be the same. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of white as the initial color. It is easy to infer that 10 is likely to be a low setting platform.

On the other hand, the selectivity of yellow as the initial color is 5% for setting 1 and 10% for setting 2.
%, and 15% for settings 3 to 6, so that the higher the received setting value, the higher the selection rate. In this embodiment, the selectivity of yellow is fixed at 15% for settings 3 to 6, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

In addition, the selection rate of the initial colors (green, red) selectable in setting 4 or setting 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) selectable in setting 6 are each set to 5%. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that an initial color other than white is selected. It becomes easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is highly likely to be a high-setting platform.

Note that the selectivity of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, and may be changed as appropriate. for example,
The rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selectivity of other colors is appropriately adjusted so that the overall selectivity becomes 100% according to the change in the selectivity of the rainbow.

[Fanfare effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 45) will be described as a mode in which the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If it is not a normal command (the result of B4101 is "N"), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (B4
The result of 101 is "Y"), and the number of big hits stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B
4103). When the number of hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4105). The predetermined number of times is 3 times, 6 times, 9 times...
and specific (eg, 3) multiples. Further, the predetermined number of times may be a natural number, for example, every odd number of times (1 time, 3 times...) or every integral number of times (2 times, 4 times...).
), or a specific sequence (for example, the Fibonacci sequence of 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, etc.).

On the other hand, when the number of hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is "N"),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. After that, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotion lottery table for lighting mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, regarding the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotion lottery color) by step-up lottery of setting suggestive effect determined by lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process at the start of the big win. explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining the lighting mode (determining the promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. Figure 5
8(A) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58(B) is a table for determining the promotion lottery color when the current color is blue. be.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), promotion lottery colors for the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white are, for example, no promotion (continue white), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow. It is selected from six types, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set values. When the current set value is set 1 to 3, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 4, green can also be selected as a promotion lottery color, if setting 5, both green and red can be selected, and if setting 6, all types can be selected. becomes selectable. Therefore, if the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player should set 4 or higher, if it is red, set 5 or higher, and if it is rainbow, set 4 or higher. 6 can be estimated.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of promotion lottery colors to be selected by lottery changes according to the current set value.

If the current set value is set to 1, the selection rate of no promotion (white continues) as the promotion lottery color is 8.
0%, 15% blue selectivity and 5% yellow selectivity. Then, the selection rate of no promotion as the promotion lottery color is 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., and is set so that the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. be done. In this embodiment, each time the current set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in increments of 5%. ) may be set to be the same.
In this way, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuation of white) as the promotion lottery color. By confirming that the game machine 10 is playing a game, it becomes easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is a low-setting machine.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, and 15% for settings 3 to 6, which are currently high. It is set so that the selectivity increases as the In this embodiment, the selectivity of yellow is fixed at 15% for settings 3 to 6, but the selectivity may be set higher as the set value increases.

In addition, the selection rate of promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or setting 5 and promotion lottery colors that can be selected in setting 6 (green, red, rainbow) is set to 5% each. . Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a promotion lottery color other than no promotion (white continuation) is selected as the promotion lottery color. By confirming that the game machine 10 is currently playing, it is easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is a high-setting machine. In addition, it is possible to estimate that the gaming machine 10 being played is highly likely to be a high-setting machine by means of the promotion lottery, which motivates the player to continue playing.

Next, the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is blue is shown in FIG.
As shown in B), for example, it is selected from five types of no promotion (continuous blue), yellow, green, red, and rainbow,
Similar to the above-described case where the current color is white, the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promotion lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set values. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, either no promotion or yellow is selected as the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect. On the other hand, if the current setting value is setting 3, green can also be selected as the promotion lottery color, if setting 4 or setting 5, red can be selected along with green, and if setting 6, All types can be selected. Therefore, if the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, the player is set to 3 or more, and if it is red, the setting is 4.
If it is above and it is a rainbow, it can be estimated that the setting is 6.

Next, it will be described how the selection rate of promotion lottery colors to be selected by lottery changes according to the current set value.

If the current set value is set to 1, the selection rate of no promotion (continuous blue) as the promotion lottery color is 9.
5%, yellow selectivity becomes 5%. Then, the selection rate of no promotion as the promotion lottery color is 80% for setting 2 and setting 3, 75% for setting 4, etc., and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. is set to In addition, in this embodiment, whenever the present set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or decreased. In this way, the lower the setting value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (continuous blue) as the promotion lottery color, so
By confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting part is in a non-promotion state during the game, the player presumes that the gaming machine 10 during the game is highly likely to be a low-setting machine. becomes easier.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 20% for setting 2, 15% for setting 3 or setting 4, and 15% for setting 5 or setting 6. is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promotion lottery color is 15% in the case of setting 3 or setting 4
Compared to , the selection rate of setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, is higher. However, in the case of setting 3, the selection rate for promotion is the yellow selection rate (15%) and the green selection rate (20%).
%). In addition, setting 2
Compared to the case of setting 3, in the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to green by two stages at once, and setting 4
In the case of , there is a possibility that it will be promoted to red by three stages. In the case of setting 5, there is a possibility that the promotion lottery color will be promoted to red at once in three stages, and in the case of setting 6, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to rainbow by four stages. Therefore, by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game, the player can easily presume that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 during the game is a high-setting machine. Become.

In addition, the promotion lottery color (not shown) of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting part is green or later is also the same as when the current color is blue. It is possible to determine whether the promotion lottery color changes to . According to such a mode, the player confirms that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the gaming machine 10 during the game is set to high. It becomes easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that it is the base of

In this embodiment, a case where a promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described, but a demotion lottery may be performed. By performing a demotion lottery, for example, if the current color of a given light-emitting portion is blue, it can be changed to white.

Further, in a case where a demotion lottery is performed, for example, after promotion to rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. By preventing the demotion lottery from being performed after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continuously obtain a sense of accomplishment that the high setting (setting 6) has reached the setting suggestive performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be made

Further, in the promotion lottery, multiple stages of promotion are possible, but in the demotion lottery, the colors may be demoted one stage at a time. In this way, in the demotion lottery, by avoiding the mode of demotion in multiple stages, it is possible to avoid the disappointment of the player due to the setting suggesting performance suddenly falling to the low setting, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the selection rate of each promotion lottery color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. For example, the rainbow selectivity in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Also, as the current color becomes a higher-ranked color, the selection rate of the higher-ranked color may be increased. Specifically, for example, setting 6
, set the rainbow selectivity to 10% if the current color is green, set the rainbow selectivity to 35% if the current color is red, etc. according to the current color hierarchy can increase the selectivity of

[Ending effect setting process]
It should be noted that the manner in which the light emitting mode of the setting suggestion effect in the above-described jackpot command process (FIG. 45) changes is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), but the ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the processing (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ending effect setting process according to the modification of the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). If the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is "
N"), ending the ending effect setting process. If it is a normal command (B420
The result of 1 is "Y"), the number of big hits stored in the RAM etc. of the effect control device 300 is +1
Update (B4202).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (B
4203). When the number of hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "Y"),
The production control device 300 draws lots for the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (B4204), and sets the ending display on the display device 41 and the ending sound from the speaker according to the setting value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be set by lottery with a selection rate (probability) according to the set value. The predetermined number of times may be a natural number, and can be set for each specific multiple, odd number of times, or integer number of times, or set to form a specific number sequence.

On the other hand, if the number of hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is "N"),
The effect control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set values (
B4205). After that, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

In addition, regarding the selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit, the selection rate in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when receiving the number of out balls]
Also, when the number of out balls is received, the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. Figure 60 shows
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing when receiving the number of out balls (B1320 in FIG. 39) according to the fourth embodiment; FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received out ball number command is a normal command (B4301). If the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is "N
”), and terminates the processing when the number of out pitches is received. When the command is normal (the result of B4301 is "Y"), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4
303). When the number of out balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received setting value (
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set for each multiple of a specific number (every 1000 balls, ie, 1000, 2000, 3000, etc.), for example. note that,
The selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls does not reach the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the processing when the number of out balls is received.

[RTC reading process]
Furthermore, the lighting mode of the setting suggesting effect may be changed during the RTC reading process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). FIG. 61 shows the RTC reading process (B
0009).

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received signal from RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). When the signal is not normal (the result of B4401 is "N")
, ends the RTC reading process. If the signal is normal (the result of B4401 is "Y"),
Effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). Information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 that serves as timekeeping means.

Then, the effect control device 300 calculates the elapsed time from the game start (or power-on) (
B4403), and it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time is a predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "Y"), the effect control device 300,
A predetermined light emission mode (color) of the light emission unit is selected according to the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every two hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00...). In addition, the selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG.
This may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time has not reached the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is "N"), the effect control device 300 terminates the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, during count information setting processing (B1322) in single-shot command processing (FIG. 39)
In addition, the lighting mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of count information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress (B4502). If the jackpot operation is not in progress (the result of B4502 is "N"), the count information setting process is terminated.

When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls (B45
04), perform update settings for display of number of balls played and count display (display of count number) (B45)
05). Here, the number of counts and the number of obtained balls are the number of counts and the number of obtained balls during consecutive games from the start of the big win to the return to the normal game state. It may be the number of acquired balls, or the total number of counts and the number of acquired balls since the game machine 10 was powered on.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of winning balls has reached a predetermined number (B4
506). When the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs a promotion lottery for the lighting mode (color) of the big winning opening LED 39d according to the received set value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set for each multiple of a specific number (every 5,000 balls, ie, 5,000, 10,000, 15,000, etc.), for example. Note that the selection rate of the lighting mode (promotion lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.
Next, display of the number of balls to be played, count display, etc. are set according to the set values as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). Here, a lottery is drawn with a selection rate corresponding to a set value for display modes such as display of the number of balls to be played and count display.

On the other hand, when the number of acquired balls is not the predetermined number (the result of B4506 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In addition, in the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B4502 is "Y"), the number of prize balls of the big winning hole is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the big winning hole LED 3
Although the 9d light emitting mode (color) was promoted lottery (B4507), by adding the winning to the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 to the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls during the normal game state,
A light-emitting portion (LED) provided in the starting prize-winning port 36 or the normal variable prize-winning device 37 may emit light according to the set value.

Here, setting the update setting of the obtained ball number display and the count display according to the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the jackpot is won in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the example of FIGS. 63A and 63B , when the number of obtained balls to be played reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the number of obtained balls to be played, the count display, and the display of other information is selected by lottery according to the set value. display settings.

When the number of acquired balls does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "N
”), the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current jackpot round number is displayed, for example, with "1" R and numerals (Arabic numerals ("1, 2, 3...")). In addition, a right-handed instruction notification 691, which is a notification to instruct right-handed hitting, is displayed at the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, at the left end of the display screen, the jackpot result mode (jackpot stop pattern,
The jackpot stop symbol "7, 7, 7" (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variable display game immediately before the special result mode) is displayed, for example, as "7" in numerical notation (Arabic numerals). and,
At the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is displayed, for example, "00
30" pt and numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the right middle corner of the display screen, the acquired ball number display 681 and the count display 682 are indicated by numbers such as "4910" and "150" (
displayed in Arabic numerals).

Next, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is "Y"), the display screen of the display device 41 during the jackpot round is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the setting value is lower, as shown in FIG.
It becomes easy to be displayed in kanji ("1, 2, 3..."). In addition, the current acquisition ball number display 68
1 ("five thousand") and count display 682 ("one hundred fifty-seven") are written in kanji (kanji ("one, two,
See...")).

FIG. 64 is for determining the display mode of the display of the number of winning balls displayed 681 and the count display 682 as setting suggestion effects and the display of other information (jackpot round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) in the fourth embodiment. is a diagram showing an example of a table of . FIG. 64(A) is a table showing that the selection rate (distribution rate) of Arabic numerals (numerical notation) or Chinese characters (kanji notation) changes depending on the setting value, and FIG. 10 is a table showing that the color selectivity changes depending on the color.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate of number notation is 45%, and the selection rate of kanji notation is 5%.
5%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate of the numerical notation is as high as 75%, and the selection rate of the kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in numerals or in kanji when the setting suggesting effect is being performed.

In addition, when the numbers are displayed, the display screen is the same as when the number of obtained balls is not the predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number, the jackpot stop pattern 677 may be displayed in Chinese characters ("seven (or lacquer)") according to the set value, such as "Suggestion effect is generated!" may be displayed on the display screen to inform the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. Furthermore, in addition to numerical notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (such as Roman numerals (
The selection rate may be set to be displayed as "I, II, III...")).

In addition, in determining the display mode of the setting suggestion effect, the selection rate of numbers, kanji, etc. is changed, and as shown in FIG. You may

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selectivity of black is 35% and the selectivity of blue is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selectivity for black is as high as 70% and the selectivity for blue is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming what color is displayed on the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

Also, when the set values are odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the selectivity of red is 20%, and even numbers (2, 4,
In the case of 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the set value is an odd number or an even number by confirming whether the display on the display screen is red or not when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

Thus, by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big win round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen. It should be noted that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to numbers and colors, and may be performed by changing the size of characters, fonts, and the like. Further, a predetermined symbol, figure, or the like corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the display screen by the setting suggestion effect.

[Modified example of light emission mode change (e.g. promotion)]
The light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emission mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variation display game. Regarding the relationship between the expectations of the jackpot in this case, if it is not a jackpot (if the expectation is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value
A mode in which the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value does not change as it is, or a mode in which the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value changes to a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation level of the effect may be adopted. In addition, after the end of the special figure variation display game, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, when the big hit is not achieved (when the expectation is low), the light emission mode of the predetermined light emission unit is made easy to be promoted with a low set value so as to suppress the decline in the desire to play. A mode in which the ratio of selection of settings 1 to 6 in the table of the promotion lottery such as 58 is reversed (for example, a mode in which the ratio of selection of settings 1 to 3 and settings 4 to 6 is reversed), and the player may be of interest to

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the lighting mode will be the lighting mode corresponding to the set value and will not change, or the lighting mode will change from the lighting mode corresponding to the set value to the lighting mode corresponding to the expectation of the production. It is good also as the aspect which changes with. In addition, after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game,
A predetermined light-emitting unit may be returned from the light-emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light-emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. In this way, during the execution period (for example, during the execution of the special figure variation display game) in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the set value is set according to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit (special result) It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggesting effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of the effect (expectation degree notification effect for notifying the degree of expectation).

Therefore, when the expectation of the big win is high, if the expectation of the big win is notified by changing the setting suggestion performance to the expectation report performance, the game can be livened up and the interest of the game is improved.
Conversely, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player have expectations, improve the interest in the game, and improve the operation of the gaming machine. There is

Furthermore, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), the light emission mode of the predetermined light emission part is made difficult to be promoted at a high set value so as to make it easier to pay attention to the performance on the display device 41. Specifically, is a mode in which the ratios of settings 1 to 6 selected in the promotion lottery table such as FIG. , the lighting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the high setting may be made uninteresting to the player. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult to raise the light emission mode of a predetermined light emission unit at a high set value. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations in a well-balanced manner without excessively arousing expectations between the performance with high expectations on the display device 41 and the light emission mode with low expectations of the predetermined light emitting part. Since the presentation on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting section, the presentation is unexpected and the entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in other cases (when the player gazes at the display device 41 at the time of notification of winning or at the start of a big win, etc.), the predetermined light-emitting portion is once set to the light-emitting mode based on the performance, and the player stops looking at the display device 41. By entering a state (situation), the light emission mode may be returned to the ratio based on the set value. Furthermore, even when the display device 41 is performing an effect that attracts attention, the light emission mode may be set to a ratio based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emission mode (color) having a low degree of expectation may be set once, and then the light emission mode may be changed to the light emission mode based on the presentation.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the hole/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hole/player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Hall/player setting mode processing activates a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (game parlor) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10, or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. can be made

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hole setting mode (B4601
). It can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress when a hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set. When in the hole setting mode (result of B4601 is "Y"), B4
606-B4616 is processed, and the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game shop)
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of (production button switch 25a, touch panel 25b).

If the effect control device 300 is not in the hole setting mode (the result of B4601 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not it is in the player setting mode (B4602). When a player setting mode in-progress flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player is in the player setting mode. If it is in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "Y"), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

If the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are established (B4603). For example, when the operation of the performance button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the performance button input process (B0010) while waiting for customers, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is met. Note that "waiting for customers" means, for example, a state in which a video for waiting customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41 . If the hole setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B4603 is "N"), the process of B4617 is executed.

When the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. Start setting is performed (B4604). Then, the hole setting mode flag is set (B4605).

Next, the production control device 300 performs hall volume adjustment processing (B4
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the luminance (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the display unit of the display device 41 (liquid crystal display, etc.)
liquid crystal luminance adjustment processing (B4608) for adjusting the luminance of the LCD, and power saving setting processing (B4609) for setting power saving. Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the luminescent color of the logo accessory (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B4611). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the production button 25 is detected in the production button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that there is an operation input to confirm the setting. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the factory setting has been confirmed (B4612). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory has been confirmed. If the factory settings are not determined (result of B4612 is "N"), B461
Proceed to the process of 4. If the factory settings have been confirmed (the result of B4612 is "Y"), the factory settings are executed to perform various settings and adjustments with the factory settings (B4613
). Factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321 . Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various brightnesses determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613 are stored in a backup memory (eg, FeRAM32
3) is written (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B4615). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B4616).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 (B460
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is established (B4617).
). When the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) during customer waiting, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is established. When the player setting mode start condition is not established (B
If the result of 4617 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, player volume adjustment processing (B4620) to adjust the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, frame decoration device 18 and board decoration A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the luminance (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (B4623). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B4623 is "Y"), screen drawing end setting is performed to end screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (B4624).
. Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). In addition, B4620-
The player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B4622 may be deleted, so they are not written to the backup memory.

[Example of display screen in hole setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
1 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of No. 1. FIG.

Effect control device 300 is that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is "Y"), starts the screen drawing in the hole setting mode (B4604), as shown in Figure 66A, the volume on the display screen A setting window 711, an emission color setting window 712, and a brightness setting window 713
display. A volume setting window 711 is a display used for hall volume adjustment processing (B4606), and a brightness setting window 713 is used for hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) and liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4607).
4608). The emission color setting window 712 is used for hall LED adjustment processing (B
4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table by the predetermined light emitting unit as described above to the hole light emission color selected in the hole setting. As described above, the operation of the volume setting window 711, the emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 is the operation of the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall.
(including the operation of

By selecting one of the colors as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed on the predetermined light emitting portion. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color) that suggests high setting, it is possible to make it look like there are plenty of high setting platforms at events etc. can. In this way, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process serve as second setting means that cannot be set by the player and can only be set by the person in charge of the hall, etc. Function. In addition, during the hole setting mode, the decoration special pattern (identification information), the reservation display part 630, the reservation display 633, the reservation digestion area 640, the special figure fluctuation reservation display 64
Display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hole setting mode is not performed during the game, by excluding unnecessary items, the display related to the hole setting mode can be made easier to see, and the processing load can be reduced. Incidentally, when the display related to the game is hidden, only the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) 616 may be displayed.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect was made to display the hall emission color with priority over the one performed according to the lottery table, but it was made to be displayed with priority only while waiting for customers, and during the actual game can give priority to the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table over the hall emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate in more detail the settings of the gaming machine 10 during the game by actually playing the game.

[Example of display screen in player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
1 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of No. 1. FIG.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and as shown in FIG. 66B, the display screen , a volume setting window 711 and a brightness setting window 713 as well as a light emission setting window 714 are displayed. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462).
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 displays the player volume adjustment process (B4620
), and the brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence/absence setting window 714 are displayed by the player LED
This is a display used for adjustment processing (B4621).

A light emission setting window 714 allows selection of whether or not to emit light from a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when the player selects no light emission, the predetermined light emitting unit does not emit light according to the setting suggestion effect. can. In this way, the light emission setting window 714 and the player's LED adjustment process function as first setting means that allows the player to set the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit. During the game, the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIGS. 55 to 62). Therefore, unlike the hole setting mode, in the player setting mode The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence or absence of light emission of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. It may be possible to set whether it can be displayed in the range, or the light emission color setting window 7 can be set as in the hole setting mode
12 may allow setting of the rendering mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting portion of the rendering device. The effect mode of the effect device is controlled depending on the setting value of the effect control device 300 (FIGS. 44, 55-62
), for example, the lighting mode of lighting members, internal accessories 44a and 44
b and the operation mode of the external accessory 95a, the presentation mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. again,
In the player setting mode, etc., it is possible to check to what extent the effect mode of the effect device is set to be displayable by the player, or whether setting suggestion effect depending on the set value is being performed. can be

In addition, the effect control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when fraud is detected by the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), or the like. reset the promotion draw color etc. to the default color (e.g. white)
can be displayed with

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
Also, during the customer waiting demo setting process (B1308) in the one-shot command process (FIG. 39), the hall setting mode (light color setting window 712 and hall L
ED adjustment processing) to cause a predetermined light-emitting portion to emit light in the hole emission color set. FIG. 67 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration setting process which concerns on embodiment.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received setting value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is "N"), the customer waiting demo setting process is terminated. If the command is normal (result of B4701 is "Y"),
The effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting part to the light emission mode (hall light emission color) of the hall setting set in the hall setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demonstration start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demonstration setting processing ends.

In this way, during the customer waiting (during the customer waiting demonstration), the lighting mode (hall lighting color) set in the hall setting mode is preferentially used instead of the lighting mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it look like there are many high-setting stands lined up at events, etc. can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed in the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to confirm the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect by playing the game. 10 could improve performance.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used during the customer waiting (during the customer waiting demonstration). A configuration is also possible.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, as the light emission mode of the effect device (predetermined light emitting unit), an example in which the color is mainly controlled depending on the set value has been shown. brightness), lighting, extinguishing, or blinking, and in the case of blinking, the blinking cycle. Moreover, if the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect device. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value change switch 102)) capable of changing setting values according to game-related settings. The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the set value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the state of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game, and the setting value can be appropriately suggested. Since it can be executed, the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this way, a setting suggestion tag that implicitly suggests a setting value (for example, setting 4 is suggested) is placed around the gaming machine 10 in hall sales. shark bill,
There is no need to install a shrimp tag suggesting setting 5, a monkfish tag suggesting setting 6), a wide space around the game machine 10 can be secured to improve the appearance, and the burden on the person in charge of the hall can be reduced. can do.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes first setting means (light emission setting window 714
, player LED adjustment processing), and second setting means (light emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment processing) in which the player cannot set the setting related to the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means.
According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the person in charge of the hall or the like can use the second setting means or the like to select a performance mode (for example,
By setting the hole emission colors such as red and rainbow), the appearance of the game machine 10 can be made as desired, and it is possible to make it appear that high-setting machines are lined up abundantly at an event or the like. Interest can be improved. In addition, since the player can set an effect mode that matches the player's taste, the interest of the player can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs of both the hall side and the player side.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game) will be a special result, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation It is possible to switch between the expectation degree notification effect that notifies the degree. Therefore, when the degree of expectation for the special result is high, if the setting suggestion performance is changed to the expectation degree notification performance and the expectation degree for the special result is notified, the game can be livened up and the interest of the game is improved. Conversely, when the expectation level is low, if the expectation level notification effect is changed to the setting suggestion effect, the player can have expectations, and the interest in the game is improved, and the operation of the gaming machine is likely to be improved. There is

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Screen transition example when the starting memory of the pending digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. This is an example of transition. In addition, the lottery of the pending change (digesting pending change) of the special figure variable pending display 643 is, for example, the advance notice lottery (B2006 or B20
09).

(A) of FIG. 68 is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decoration pattern A is provided in the left area 610A and the right area 610B. The decoration first pattern B is enlarged, and the decoration first pattern C is enlarged and displayed in the middle area 610C, and the symbols "2, 4, 5" are stopped and displayed.

At the lower center of the display screen, a pending digestion area 640 (specific display area, variable pending display area) and a pending display area 630 are displayed as starting memory display areas. The pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 are preferentially displayed on the front (upper layer) than the variable display of the variable display area 610 . Setting of such preferential display may be executed, for example, in effect display editing processing (B0015).

In the pending digestion area 640, a special figure variation pending display 643 (start memory display, special figure digesting pending display) corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed (digested) is displayed. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, on the back (lower layer) of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the starting memory display background 640A as the pedestal of the special figure variable pending display 643 is displayed in a low image quality state. . In FIGS. 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the starting memory display background 640A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the state of low image quality (first display mode) is a state in which improvement of power saving performance and reduction of graphic processing load are prioritized over improvement of visibility for the player. The number should be low (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), and the brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. should be suppressed (for example, less than 50 out of 100,
-100 to +100 can be adjusted to less than ±0), low resolution (e.g., less than 720p (1280 x 720) resolution), frame rate per second (fps) or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, by performing low image quality processing on the image of the original high image quality starting memory display background 640A in the game machine 10 by processing such as the VDP 312,
It is possible to display a low-quality starting memory display background 640A on the display screen of the display device 41 instead of a high-quality one. Also, for example, both a low image quality image and a high image quality (or normal image quality) image of the start memory display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low image quality image and the high image quality image are replaced depending on the situation. , the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in low quality (or high quality).

A background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the starting memory display background 640A is arranged above the starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed, for example, in a two-leaf display mode arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. 68(a). The background object 640B is also displayed in a low quality state like the starting memory display background 640A. Also, the background object 640B is displayed in the same priority (same layer) as the starting memory display background 640A, that is, in an integrated manner. Note that the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B may be set to be displayed in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44), for example. Also, the background object 640B is set to the starting storage display background 640
You may preferentially display on the front (upper layer layer) of A. In addition, conversely, the starting memory display background 640A may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

In the pending display portion 630, a pending display 633 (starting memory display,
Special figure pending display) is displayed up to four, and three pending displays 633 are displayed in the pending display portion 630 in (a) of FIG. 68 . The pending display 633 is placed over a portion of the starting memory display background 640A and displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A. In this way, the effect control device 300 displays the pending display 633 on the pending display portion 630, and functions as a starting memory display control means that executes control to display the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 on the pending digestion area 640. Production control device 300, the display setting of the pending display 633 and the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, for example, at the time of the pending shift, in step B2015 of the variable production setting process (FIG. 44), and at the time of pending occurrence, a single-shot system command It may be executed in the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310) or the special figure 2 reservation information setting process (B1312) of the process.

FIG. 68(b) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure variation display game is being executed in response to the special figure variation pending display 643 . A plurality of variable display areas 6 on the display screen
10, the decoration first patterns A to C are variably displayed in a normal variability mode. In the following figures, when the decorative first patterns A to C are variably displayed in a normal variable mode, the variably displayed first decorative patterns A to C are indicated by "↓".

FIG. 68(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when a hold change occurs due to establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, hold change during digestion, pre-reading notice, etc.) during execution of the special figure variation display game.
Here, the suspension display 643 during special figure fluctuation is suspended and changed, but the suspension display 633 may be suspended and changed as a pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a hold change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the hold display 643 during a special figure fluctuation suggests that the degree of expectation is high from the normal round display mode by changing the hold It becomes a star-shaped display mode.

In addition, the display of the starting memory display background 640A is switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state at the same time as the pending change. 68 to 69B, the starting memory display background 64
Fine hatching of 0A indicates that the starting memory display background 640A is displayed in a high quality state. Background object 640B is also displayed in a high image quality state (second display mode) in the same manner as starting memory display background 640A. The background object 640B changes from the normal two-leaf display to a flower-like display that suggests a high degree of expectation. In addition, the change in the image quality and display mode of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is performed at the same timing as the hold change (digestion hold change) of the special figure fluctuation hold display 643 drawn as a notice. For example, the display may be set in step B2013 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the state of high image quality (second display mode) is a state in which improvement of visibility for the player is prioritized over improvement of power saving performance and reduction of graphic processing load. Higher number (for example, display with 921,600 pixels or more), stronger brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps, -
Displayed at ±0 or more when adjustable from 100 to +100), high resolution (for example, displayed at a resolution of 720p (1280 x 720) or higher), frame rate per second (fps) Higher (for example, 30 fps or more), or display of uncompressed images or images with low compression rate.

(E) of FIG. 68 shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop symbol) in the variation display area 610 becomes a losing result mode (loose stop symbol). is the screen. In the decorative first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610, "
3, 7, 2" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, and the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high image quality state to a low image quality state and displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-like display mode to the foliage-like display mode. Starting memory display background 6 at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game
The display setting of 40A and the background object 640B may be performed based on the symbol type (loss symbol or big hit symbol), for example, as part of the stop setting (B1331) of single-shot command processing. After that, the oldest starting memory of the pending display 633 moves to the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. In addition, the timing at which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high image quality state to a low image quality state is not limited to when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and becomes hidden, and a predetermined effect or when the decoration first symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or when the next special figure variation display game is started.

(O) of FIG. 68 is a display when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop result (stop symbol) in the variation display area 610 becomes a big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode). 4 is a display screen of the device 41. FIG. "3, 3, 3" is stop-displayed as a jackpot stop pattern in the decoration first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610, and "big hit!"
! ” is displayed. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, but the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are maintained in a high image quality state. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. After that, a big win round game is started, and a big win round effect is executed.

In addition, switching the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from low image quality to high image quality is performed when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 changes to a star-shaped display mode (Fig. 68
No (c)), but the previous stage, that is, when starting the special figure fluctuation display game (Fig. 68
(immediately after (a)) or immediately before the occurrence of the hold change during digestion ((i) in FIG. 68). In addition, in the case of a gradual pending change or during a continuous effect (during a continuous advance notice effect or a pseudo continuous effect), the image quality of the starting memory display background 640A may be switched step by step.
Also, for example, when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the pending display 633 is displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the starting memory display background 640A is switched to a darker color such as black, and the special figure is changing You may make it easy to distinguish from the pending|holding display 643 and the pending|holding display 633. FIG. Furthermore, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, the hold display is 4
When the number of pieces reaches and overflows, or when a game ball wins in the general winning hole 35, etc., the starting memory display background 640A may be switched to high image quality so that the player can easily recognize it. again,
Start when the decoration 1st patterns A to C are stopped or temporarily stopped by the execution of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game with a specific pattern (reservation change pattern suggesting or confirming a reservation change, or when the chance number is stopped, etc.) The stored display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to a mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with low image quality, but a mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are slightly visible but inconspicuous. can be displayed with For example, as an inconspicuous mode, another image may be displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B (front, upper layer) so as to cover the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. can. In this case, the other images include, for example, an image or a mosaic image that is the same as the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B but lightened, and a back (back, lower layer) starting memory display background 640A and background. object 6
A transparent image or the like that allows 40B to be visually recognized can be used. The second display mode is not limited to the mode in which the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and the other image displayed in front of the starting memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is hidden. You may display in the form.

[Screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the pending consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. be. In addition, the following FIGS. 69A and 69B
68 will be omitted as appropriate.

(ka) of FIG. 69A is the display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 are decorated with first patterns A to C.
is stop-displayed in the pattern of "2, 4, 5", and a special figure fluctuation pending display 643 corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. - 特許庁Also, the retained digestion region 64
At 0, on the back (lower layer) of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the pedestal 640C of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the low image quality starting memory display background 640A are displayed. Pedestal 640C is preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) of starting memory display background 640A. The starting memory display background 640A has narrower upper and left areas than the starting memory display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, at the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying an effect related to the special figure variation display game is displayed, and in the effect display area 641, a walking girl whose display mode can be changed according to the effect is displayed. A character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, the fact that the line representing the character 641A is thin indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed preferentially to the front (upper layer) than the variable display area 610 , similarly to the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630 . For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the pending digestion area 640 and the pending display portion 630, and has the same display priority. Also, the character 641A is preferentially displayed in front of the effect display area 641 (upper layer). In addition, character 6
41A and effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. In addition, the character 641A is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 and the pending
30 (upper layer), or conversely, the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display portion 630 may be preferentially displayed in front of the character 641A. In this manner, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 69A (ki) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure variation display game is being executed in response to the special figure variation pending display 643 . In the plurality of variable display areas 610,
The first ornamental patterns A to C are variably displayed (“↓”) in a normal variable mode.

Here, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed as a character different from the one shown in FIG. 69A (a different character from the high image quality character 641B described later).
Also, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in (K) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the low-quality character 641A may be a lying aspect in contrast to the standing aspect of FIG. 69A, or a walking and moving aspect of FIG. 69A. It may be in a stationary mode. In addition, the character 641A is in a state of standing still before the decoration special figure variation display game is started ((ka) in FIG. 69A),
After the start of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game ((ki) in FIG. 69A), it may be in a mode of walking and operating.

In FIG. 69A (H), the character 641A in the effect display area 641 during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game changes to the character 641B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the change in hold during digestion, the occurrence of a pre-reading notice, the notice effect, etc.) It is a display screen of the display device 41 when changed. Character 641B is a girl who is happy to eat a rice ball that suggests high expectations, and is displayed with high image quality. In addition, in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the fact that the line representing the character 641B is thick indicates that the character 641B is displayed with high image quality. In addition, a starting memory display background 640A, a pedestal 640C, a pending digestion area 640, and an effect display area 64
1 is also displayed with high image quality. Further, the predetermined condition is specifically the character 641A
If (641B) partially invades the starting memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the holding display, or if it is displayed near the starting memory display background 640A, the special figure changing pending display 643 or hold This is the case of executing a pending change effect that waits until the timing of acting on the display 633 . The timing for switching to the high-quality character 641B when a predetermined condition is met can be when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or when it is displayed near the starting memory display background 640A. can. In addition, when the character 641A acts on the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 or the pending display, it may be switched to the high-quality character 641B, and when the character 641A moves toward the starting memory display background 640A or the starting memory display background You may switch to the high-definition character 641B at the time of the next special figure fluctuation display game start, etc. when displayed near 640A.

Here, the high image quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in (c) of FIG. 69A (another character different from the low image quality character 641A described later).
Also, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a manner different from that shown in (c) of FIG. 69A. For example, another aspect of the high-definition character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (moving speed) is increased from (ki) in FIG. 69A. It should be noted that the low image quality character 641A may be kept stationary in FIG. 69A (ki), and the high image quality character 641B may walk and move in FIG. 69A (c).

FIG. 69A (ke) shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 is removed and becomes a stop symbol ("3, 7, 2"). is the screen. The special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, and the starting memory display background 6
40A, pedestal 640C, and effect display area 641 are displayed in a low image quality state. Also, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. After that, the next special figure variation display game is started by storing the starting memory.

FIG. 69(ko) shows the display of the display device 41 when the special figure variation display game being executed is finished and the stop symbol in the variation display area 610 becomes the jackpot stop symbol ("3, 3, 3"). is the screen. Below the variable display area 610 is displayed the characters "big win!!". The special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, but the starting memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C,
And the effect display area 641 maintains a high image quality state. Also, the effect display of the girl who is happy to eat the rice ball of the character 641B is maintained as it is. After that, a big win round game is started, and a big win round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, another screen transition example when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the pending consumption area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. is another example of screen transition.

(K') in FIG. 69B is the display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure fluctuation display game when a predetermined effect (for example, advance notice effect, etc.) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (Ki) in FIG. 69A. be. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. The character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed with high image quality. On the other hand, the starting memory display background 640A and pedestal 640C of the pending digestion area 640 are maintained in a lower quality state. After that, when the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes a lost stop symbol (for example, "3, 7, 2"), proceed to (ke) in FIG. ) in the case of Fig. 6
Proceed to (here) of 9A. Incidentally, when a predetermined effect is generated in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) than the reserved digest area 640. FIG. By doing so, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground to emphasize the effect of the character 641B. In addition, the advance notice effect is performed when the decoration first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610 are ready, or when the player responds to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. This can occur when the effect button 25 is operated.

(K'') in FIG. 69B is a predetermined effect (
For example, it is a display screen of the display device 41 during the special figure fluctuation display game when a change in digestion pending, a prefetch notice, etc.) occurs. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 changes to a star-like display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high. Then, the pedestal 640C, the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the starting memory display background 640A are switched from the low image quality state to the high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed, and the display of the effect display area 641 and the character 641A is maintained in a state of low image quality. In addition, in correspondence with changing the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 to a star-shaped display mode, the shape of the pedestal 640C is, for example, a crescent shape. It may change into a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 is
If it becomes a stop symbol (for example, "372"), proceed to (v) of FIG. 69A, and if it becomes a big hit stop symbol (eg, "333"), proceed to (ko) of FIG.

Incidentally, when a predetermined effect is generated in the pending digestion area 640, the pending digestion area 640 may be preferentially displayed in front (upper layer) than the effect display area 641. FIG. By doing so, for example, the pending digestion region 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the change in the display mode of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and the pending display 633 can be emphasized.

Also, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the pending change, the pedestal 640c also has a high image quality similar to the special figure fluctuation pending display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be lower than the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 (lower image quality than the special figure fluctuation pending display 643). Thus, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively lower than the image quality of the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, the player can easily gaze at the special figure fluctuation pending display 643, which is the main part of the production, so that the game It is possible to reduce the processing load while maintaining the interest of the user.

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the pending change, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is displayed from the special figure fluctuation pending display 643. It may also be made higher (higher image quality than special figure fluctuation pending display 643). Unexpectedness is generated by intentionally displaying the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 with relatively low image quality on the high image quality pedestal 640c, and the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 is rather conspicuous, and the interest of the game is increased. can be improved.

Further, when the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 becomes high image quality, the pedestal 640c may maintain low image quality. Decoration of special figure fluctuation pending display 643 and special figure fluctuation pending display 64
This is because the pedestal 640c only needs to have a function indicating that 3 is pending during digestion, and this function is maintained even if the image is displayed in low image quality.

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is a variation display game (special figure variation display game) based on a plurality of identification information (identification pattern, special decoration pattern, first decoration pattern A to C) based on the establishment of the start condition.
The result of the variable display game is a special result (jackpot result mode,
A special game state advantageous to the player can be generated when the jackpot stop symbol, special result mode). The gaming machine 10 includes start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition, and display of the variable display game on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game. A starting memory display control means (production control device 300) capable of executing control to display a starting memory display (special figure fluctuation pending display 643, pending display 633) corresponding to the starting memory in the starting memory display area. Prepare. The starting memory display control means displays the starting memory display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back of the starting memory display so as to overlap the starting memory display in the starting memory display area. Based on this, the starting memory display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to the gaming machine 10, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the starting memory display changes. In this case, the starting memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, the special figure fluctuation pending display 64
Although there is a problem that 3 may be seen mixed with the decoration first patterns A to C, etc., when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize the starting memory display, it can be easily displayed and visually recognized by the player. It is possible to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics etc. when there is relatively little need (when the degree of expectation is low, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility for the player, improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10, and reduce the processing load. be able to. Further, for example, when the need for the player to visually recognize the starting memory display is relatively small, the identification information (decorative first patterns A to C) of the variable display area 610 to be relatively conspicuous is set more than the starting memory display. Since the identification information is displayed with high image quality, the identification information can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, by displaying the starting memory display background 640A with low image quality in other cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the starting memory display area, and to prevent the image of the display screen on the liquid crystal display. can be suppressed from sticking.

The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means ( Effect control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the first display mode (eg, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and switch the effect to the second display mode (eg, high image quality) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear mixed with the decoration first symbols A to C, etc. Hold display 633)
In addition, the effect display area 641 can also be displayed so that the player can easily see it when a predetermined condition is established, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays an effect game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the variable display game (variable display game on the collective display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the starting condition. Executable production game means (production control device 300), a specific display area (production display area 641) displayed with priority over the production game (decorative special figure variation display game) in the display device 41, and the specific display A specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
, 641B) and display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing display control. The display control means (production control device 300) sets the specific display area to the first display mode (
(for example, low image quality), the specific character is displayed in a first presentation mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific display area is displayed in a second display mode (for example, different from the first display mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition high image quality), and the specific character can be switched to a second rendering mode (for example, high image quality).

Therefore, when there is relatively little need for the player to visually recognize the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific character is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ) to improve the power saving performance of the game machine 10 and reduce the processing load of the display control means (the effect control device 300) such as graphics. Conversely, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and the player is instructed to display a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6).
41A, 641B) can be easily made visible.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. FIG. This embodiment relates to the driver 150 (here, the LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt processing of the sixth embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but after the state display edit output processing (A1318), the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71)
LED driver initialization processing (A15001) for initializing is added. After initial setting of the LED driver 153, LED data transmission processing (A
16001) is performed. In this embodiment, the configuration of the LED driver 153 will be described, and then the initial setting process and the LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

Note that LED driver initial setting processing (A15001) and LED data transmission processing (A16
001) may be changed. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A1
5001) is an LED data transmission process (A16001) in the next timer interrupt process.
Therefore, the LED driver 153 is initialized.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of an LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of this embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. Also, the collective driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, and the ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c, which will be described later, are the same as the LED driver 153. FIG.

The LED driver 153 displays digits 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1) sequentially selected by a dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method).
), 900-0 (digit 0)) is energized to light up. The digit indicator 900 that constitutes the status display device 152 is a 7-segment type (or 8-segment type), or has 8 dot-like LEDs.
Including lamp bundles. The LED driver 153 may be either anode common or cathode common.

The LED driver 153 includes a role ratio driver 153b and a ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 15
3c, as indicated by the dotted line, a 16-bit command from the game microcomputer 111 via the previous stage LED driver 153 (the first stage batch driver 153a and the second stage ratio driver 153b) is sent. When the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, a 16-bit command is transmitted directly from the game microcomputer 111 without going through the LED driver 153 in the previous stage.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163, a 16-bit latch circuit 1
64, latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuits: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
digit 3) 167a-167d, control unit 173, oscillation unit 174, 4-to-1 data selector 1
83, a character generator (decoder) 185, a two-to-one data selector 187, a segment driver 193, and a digit driver 195. Note that the control unit 173 includes a number-of-digits setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, a standby mode setting unit 1
78. The oscillation unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (in particular, the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). An 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Furthermore, the LED driver 153 may include an emission color control section that controls the emission color of the LEDs (or segments).

A 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be directly output to another LED driver 153 from the data output terminal. The data in the 16-bit shift register 163 is transferred to the 16-bit latch circuit 1
64 is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 at the timing (latch timing) at which the latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is received.

The upper 8 bits of the command held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 are sent to the latch selector 165 , number-of-digits setting section 175 , duty setting section 176 , data selection section 177 and standby mode setting section 178 . Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to 8-bit latches 167a-167d. In addition, lower 8-bit data (required bits (for example, 4 bits) may also be sent) to number-of-digits setting section 175 , duty setting section 176 , data selection section 177 , and standby mode setting section 178 .

When the upper 8 bits (address part) indicate the address of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 (for example, 21H (hexadecimal notation)), the number-of-digits setting unit 175 stores the control data (initial setting data), the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken in, and the corresponding number of digits (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal representation, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). Note that the number of digits to be set is
This is the number of 0s (number of digits), which is 4 in this embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting section 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal representation))
, the duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (or only the necessary bits) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, and corresponding duty ratio ( For example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal representation, X is arbitrary)) are set (initial settings). Note that the brightness (luminescence intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900
corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. As for the source driver, the digit driver 195 corresponds to the anode common, and the segment driver 193 corresponds to the cathode common.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selection unit 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal notation)), the data selection unit 177 selects the lower 8 bits (necessary bits) are taken in, and use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. The address of the data selection unit 177 and the number-of-digits setting unit 175 may be the same, and the use/non-use setting of the decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and the number-of-digits setting of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( Data selection unit 1
77 and the number-of-digits setting part 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

That is, the data selector 177 sends the data in the 8-bit latch to the character generator 18.
5 is used as decoded data or the data in the 8-bit latch is used as non-decoded data. 8 if decoded
The data in the bit latch is regarded as a character code and decoded into character lighting pattern data. When the data in the 8-bit latch is directly used as non-decode data, the data selection unit 177 outputs two data selection signals indicating selection of non-decode data.
It is sent to the pair 1 data selector 187 . In this way, the data selection unit 177 determines whether or not to use the decoding function by a command from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).
(including control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or the command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (eg, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal expression: X is arbitrary), etc.), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are fetched. For example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to turn off the segment driving unit 193 or the digit driving unit 195 to switch the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H). 193 and Digit Driver 1
95 is forcibly turned off to turn off all digits of the display 900 (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), and the segment drive section 193 and digit drive section 195 of the LED driver 153 are normally operated by the dynamic drive method. (in the case of 1XH). Note that in standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. In addition, in normal operation, after driving the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 once, the data in the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected in the display of the display 900 just by storing the data in the 8-bit latch. be.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal representation))
, the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. As a result, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and takes in (sets) the lower 8-bit (data part) lighting pattern data or character code. Similarly,
The upper 8 bits are any of the addresses of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d (for example, 23H).
, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal representation)), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to one of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d receive the lower 8 bits (data part) addressed to themselves.
lighting pattern data or character code can be latched and taken in.

A latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111 is input to the latch selector 165, and the latch selector 165 outputs the latch signal to the 8-bit latches 167a-16.
7d to select any one of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. The 8-bit latches 167a-167d then store digit 0 and digit 1 addressed to themselves, respectively.
, digit 2 and digit 3 display data for the display 900 can be held.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize a dynamic drive system (dynamic lighting system). do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183 is
Data of one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a-167d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. Digit line selection is performed by outputting an on/off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, an on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, a current draw voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) is applied. Information indicating which digit line is selected by the digit driver 195 may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183 .

For example, when the digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select the digit line of digit 0, the data in the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, the digit driver 19
5 outputs a drive signal to select the digit lines of digit 1, digit 2 and digit 3, the data in the 8-bit latches 167b, 167c and 167d are selected, respectively.

Character generator 185 decodes the data sent from 4:1 data selector 183 . When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 converts the character code into lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code by decoding processing. Convert to

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating character codes and corresponding character lighting patterns. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code "X10...B" corresponds to lighting pattern data for lighting the decimal point (Dp). Various character codes can be defined to correspond to characters. The character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines the correspondence relationship between character codes (input) and characters (output) (character lighting pattern data). etc. For example, the character code "X0011010B" is the character "-"
corresponding to the lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0)) (for example, "00000
010B"). Since the batch driver 153a uses non-decoded data, it uses the lighting pattern data (for example, "00000010B") sent from the gaming microcomputer 111 as it is when lighting (turning on) only the segment g. .

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d, so the character generator 185 outputs the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
67d, so the character generator 18
5 only converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by decoding. If the appropriate lighting pattern data coincidentally matches any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the batch driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character.

The 2:1 data selector 187 directly outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4:1 data selector 183 in response to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177 . Any one of the non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment driver 193 . The non-decoded data is data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without going through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2:1 data selector 187
It outputs non-decoded data, and outputs decoded data when the data selection signal is not input.

If the LED driver 153 is the batch driver 153a, the two-to-one data selector 1
87 receives a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data, and always outputs appropriate lighting pattern data held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d to the segment driving section 193. FIG. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, the 2:1 data selector 187 does not receive the data selection signal, and the character is always lit. The pattern data (decode data) will be output to the segment driving section 193 .

The segment driver 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decoded data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the indicator 900 of the digit corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit driver 195 ( dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is ON/OFF data of light emission of the eight LEDs (segments ag, Dp or eight dotted LEDs) of the indicator 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment driving section 193 applies a current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a driving voltage to turn the LEDs on (light emitting state). In the case of cathode common, LE
Let D be in the on state (light emitting state).

The eight LEDs of the indicator 900 are of the 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dots)
In the display 900 of , the segments are ag and Dp. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34(A),
The eight LEDs of the indicator 900 are a set of eight point LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a set of 8 point LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D
17).

A digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal to select a digit line for each digit. The digit driver 195 applies an ON voltage to the digit line in the case of anode common, and applies a current drawing voltage (OFF voltage) to the digit line in the case of cathode common as the drive signal.

The resistor connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) connects one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND), and a constant current circuit composed of the segment driving section 193 and the segment driving section 193 performs segmentation. The current value flowing through the line can be set. This will
A common current value can be supplied to all LEDs.

Furthermore, a light emission color control section (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). In the main process and the timer interrupt process, the emission color control unit
It is possible to receive a command (control data) relating to the color of the LED and send a command signal to the segment driving section 193 to control the color of light emitted by the LED. Segment drive unit 1
A reference numeral 93 applies a drive voltage to the segment lines of the color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control unit to drive them. A segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display device 900 .

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment was initialized in the main process. At this time, initial setting is performed for the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (furthermore, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, at least one of the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 is initialized even in timer interrupt processing. As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an undefined value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the timer interrupt processing sets the correct setting value and then outputs the driving data (LED command). This makes it possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 due to noise or the like. Further, when the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt processing, the initialization in the main processing (A1016)
can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the number-of-digits setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
76 will be described as an example.

[Initial setting command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between initial setting commands and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. Note that in FIG. 73, the initial setting command has an address part (8
bits) are omitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs an initial setting command (digit) ((digit) is the initial setting value of the number of digits) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), including initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175, Initial setting data (du) for duty setting unit 176 ((
Du) is the initial setting command (Du) containing the duty ratio initial setting value) (8 bits)
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (16 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting section 175 by the initial setting command (digit). be done. Then, the next initial setting command (du) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal,
The initial setting data (Du) is sent to the duty setting unit 176 by the initial setting command (Du).
is stored. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting section 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting section 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
Referring to FIG. 74, LED driver initial setting process (A15 in FIG. 70) according to the sixth embodiment.
001) will be explained. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the procedure of LED driver initial setting processing according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b, and the character code (8 bits) stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role ratio display data.

The game microcomputer 111 first generates an initial setting command (digit) related to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and clocks the clock. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the game microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (du) in the same manner as described above (
A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the relationship between LED commands and latches transmitted to the LED driver according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (16 bits)
A latch signal is output each time a The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

The 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153 holds the first LED command (digit 0) by the first latch signal, and the LED command (digit 0) outputs the character ratio display data (digit 0) to the 8-bit latch 167a. ) is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal,
According to the LED command (digit 1), the character ratio display data (digit 1
) is stored. The 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the third LED command (digit 2) by the third latch signal, and the character ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). remembered. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal, and the character ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). remembered.

[LED data transmission processing]
LED driver transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment. The game microcomputer 111 first generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) containing the character ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and generates the LED command (digit 0 ) is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The game microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) containing the character product ratio display data (digit 1) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) in the same manner as described above. (A16011). The game microcomputer 111 outputs an LED command (digit 2
) (A16015), and transmit the LED command (digit 2) (A16017)
. The game microcomputer 111 stores the character ratio display data (
An LED command (digit 3) including digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, the LED commands (character product ratio display data=character code) are transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be set arbitrarily.

[Cascade Connection of LED Drivers According to First Modification]
FIG. 77 shows the LED driver 153 (role ratio driver 1) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.
53b, the details of the cascade connection of the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c) are shown. In the cascade connection, the role ratio driver 153b is the first stage, and the ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver 15
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the role ratio driver 153b, and then transmitted as it is from the role ratio driver 153b to the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c. be. That is, the serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are sequentially transmitted to the role ratio driver 153b, the payout rate/
It is transmitted to the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can serially transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code using one serial communication circuit. The game microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the role ratio driver 153b and the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing the details of the character product ratio display section 68 that displays the character product ratio. The character object ratio display section 68 in the state display device 152 is formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portions) displays 900 in the horizontal direction. , digit 2, and digit 3 are shown. The character ratio display unit 68 displays the total character ratio (for example, "y50.8") and the continuous character ratio (for example, "r58.4").
) can be switched and displayed. In addition, digit 3 (fourth digit from the right) is the character "y" indicating the total role ratio (generally used role ratio), or the character "y" indicating the continuous role ratio
r" may be displayed.

The role ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. Each digit (digit 3,
digit 2, digit 1, digit 0). This character code (character material ratio display data) is the character material ratio calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (Fig. 6
, A1318 in FIG. 70). The role ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set the use/non-use of decoded data by the character generator 185. is set to use the decoded data. That is, the role ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use a decoding function for generating lighting data for the role product ratio display section 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78B is a diagram showing the details of the discharged ball number display portion 66 that displays the discharged ball number and the ball output rate display portion 67 that displays the ball output rate. The discharged ball count display portion 66 and the ball output rate display portion 67 in the state display device 152 are four 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot portions) displays 9.
00 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and from the right, a display 900 indicating the digit 0 and a display 9 indicating the digit 1
00 corresponds to the discharged ball number display portion 66, and the display device 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display device 900 indicating the digit 3 from the right correspond to the payout percentage display portion 67. FIG. Conversely, a display 900 indicating the digit 0 and a display 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the payout rate display portion 67 from the right, and a display 900 indicating the digit 2 and a display 900 indicating the digit 3 are discharged from the right. It may correspond to the pitch display section 66 . The discharged ball number display portion 66 and the ball output rate display portion 67 can be displayed at the same time.

The driver 153c (Fig. 77) for ball output rate/number of discharged balls receives the character code (character code) received from the game microcomputer 111 via the role ratio driver 153b, and lights the character indicated by the character code. After conversion into pattern data, the lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the discharged ball number display section 66 and the ball output rate display section 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The ball-out ratio/ball-out driver 153c decodes the character code into the lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code (ball-out display data or ball-out ratio display data). ) and the use/non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoded data is set to be used. That is, the ball-out ratio/number-of-discharged-balls driver 153c can set whether or not to use a decoding function for generating lighting data for the number-of-balls-out display portion 66 and the number-of-balls-out display portion 67 from the character code.

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to the first modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to the role ratio driver and the ball payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. In addition, FIG.
, the initial setting command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits). The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. bits) are included in the initial setting command (32 bits) in order, and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of discharged balls,
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting section 176 of the role ratio driver 153b is included in the initial setting command (32 bits) and transmitted.

The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initialization command (32 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the ball output rate/number of discharged balls
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75 . At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of the driver for the ball output rate/number of discharged balls and the driver for the role ratio]
The LED driver initial setting process (A15001 in FIG. 70) according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of initial setting processing for the role ratio driver and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game microcomputer 111 first sets the number of digits setting unit 17 of the driver 153c for payout rate/number of discharged balls.
Initial setting command (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit )b (16 bits) (A15007), and the initial setting commands (digits) c and b (32 bits) are connected in the order of the initial setting command (digit) c and the initial setting command (digit) b to the serial communication circuit. and transmit it together with the clock signal (A150
09).

Next, the game microcomputer 111 issues an initial setting command (
An initial setting command (Du)b (16 bits) containing initial setting data (Du)b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b (A15011). (A15012) and initialize command (Du) c
, initial setting command (Du) b (32
bit) is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the first modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the role ratio driver and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the role ratio driver 153b is character product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3)
, and the character code stored in the payout rate/ball count driver 153c is the payout rate display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the payout rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). In addition, Fig. 81
, the LED command is shown by omitting the address part (8 bits).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
7a, the number of discharged ball display data (digit 0) c (8 bits), and the role ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the role ratio driver 153b. Generated and transmitted in the form included in the LED command (32 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c
) c (8 bits), and the role product ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the form of being included in the LED command (32 bits) in this order. .

Here, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an LED command (32 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (
Digit 0)b is stored.

Then, by the next latch signal, the number-of-discharged-balls display data (digit 1)c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the ball-out ratio/number-of-discharged balls. At the same time, the role ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b.

Although not shown in FIG. 81, after that, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the payout ratio display data (digit 2) c in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c.
(8 bits), and the character ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b are generated and transmitted in the form of including them in the command (32 bits) in this order, and then , Pitching ratio display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c, 8-bit latch 167 of the winning ratio driver 153b
The character product ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d is generated and transmitted in the form of including these in the command (32 bits).

Therefore, the next latch signal causes the payout ratio display data (digit 2) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b to display the role ratio display data (digit 2).
b is stored.

Further, the next latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167d of the driver 153c for the payout rate/number of discharged balls to store the payout rate display data (digit 3) c. At the same time, according to the LED command (digit 3)b, the role product ratio display data (digit 3)b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b.

[LED data transmission processing according to the first modification]
LED driver transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0) c (8 bits) containing the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c ( 16 bits) (A16002), and generate an LED command (digit 0)b containing the punctuation ratio display data (digit 0)b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b (A16003), LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b (32 bits) concatenated in this order are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Generate an LED command (digit 1) c containing the number of discharged balls display data (digit 1) c to be stored in 7b (A16008), and the role ratio display data ( Generate LED command (digit 1) b containing digit 1) b (A1600
9) The LED command (digit 1) c and the LED command (digit 1) b linked in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Generate an LED command (digit 2) c containing the payout rate display data (digit 2) c to be stored in 7c (A16014), and the role ratio display data ( Generate an LED command (digit 2) b containing digit 2) b (A16015
), LED command (digit 2) c, and LED command (digit 2) b in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Generate an LED command (digit 3) c containing the payout rate display data (digit 3) c to be stored in 7d (A16020), and the role ratio display data ( Generate LED command (digit 3) b including digit 3) b (A16021
), LED command (digit 3) c, and LED command (digit 3) b in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game control device according to the second modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the sixth embodiment is the game control device 100 of the first embodiment.
, but the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated into the collective display device 50. Moreover, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment
, a collective driver 153a, a role ratio driver 153b, and a ball payout rate/discharged ball number driver 153c are cascade-connected in that order by data signal lines, and a data signal line extending from the gaming microcomputer 111 is connected to the collective driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade Connection of LED Drivers According to Second Modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing details of cascade connection of LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the role ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the ball payout ratio/discharged ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. Serial data transmitted from game microcomputer 111 (initial setting command, LED command)
is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and the role ratio driver 1 is transmitted from the collective driver 153a.
53b as is. Then, the serial data sent to the role ratio driver 153b is sent as it is from the role ratio driver 153b to the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the game microcomputer 111 are sequentially applied to the batch driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, the ball output rate/the number of discharged balls. is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can serially transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 sends a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the batch driver 153a, the role ratio driver 153b, and the ball payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c.
Send to

The collective driver 153a controls the lighting of the collective display section (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. FIG. The collective driver 153a has a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a dot) indicator 900 (LED lamp), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (D1) as a digit 0 indicator 900, the second Special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (D2)
is controlled as the digit 1 indicator 900 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

The collective driver 153a is originally intended to control the 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dots) display 900 itself. The round display unit 60 and the eight dotted LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first game state display unit 57 are the segments (a-g
, Dp) (see FIG. 2B, etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a has a reservation storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation display 54, special figure 2 reservation display 55, general figure reservation display 56),
Eight dotted LED lamps (D9,
D11-D16, D17) are regarded as segments (ag, Dp) of the display 900 of the digit 3 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, the batch driver 153a actually
b and the LED driver 153 (same IC) of the same kind as the driver 153c for ball output rate/number of discharged balls, but the batch driver 153a does not use decoded data by the character generator 185 even if it has the character generator 185. It is set (not used).

[Transmission timing chart of initial setting command according to second modification]
FIG. 85 shows a batch driver, role ratio driver, and
FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing initial setting commands sent to a ball payout rate/balls discharged driver; FIG. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c, and initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting section 175 of the winning ratio driver 153b. bit), initial setting data (8 bits) for the number of digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits) in this order, and the duty setting of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls is transmitted. initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b, and duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a initial setting data (digit) a (8
bit) in the order included in the command (48 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for ball output rate/number of discharged balls
Initial setting data (digit) c is stored in 75 . At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial set data (digit) a is stored in the digit number setting section 175 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du)c is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)b is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du)a is stored in the duty setting section 176 of the batch driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of ball output rate/number of discharged balls driver, role ratio driver, batch driver]
LED driver initial setting processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 shows a batch driver, a role ratio driver, and a
3 is a flow chart showing a procedure of initial setting processing of a driver for ball output rate/number of discharged balls.

The gaming microcomputer 111 first sets the number of digits setting unit 17 of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c.
Initial setting command (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A15006), and an initial setting command (digit )b (16 bits) (A15007), and an initial setting command (digit) a including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used in the number of digits setting unit 175 of the batch driver 153a (16 bits) (A15008), initial setting command (digit) c,
Initial setting commands (digits) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of initial setting command (digit) b and initial setting command (digit) a are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A15010).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 issues an initial setting command (
An initial setting command (Du)b (16 bits) that generates (A15011) and includes initial setting data (Du)b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the role ratio driver 153b (A15012), generates an initial setting command (Du)a (16 bits) including initial setting data (Du)a relating to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the batch driver 153a (A15013), and generates an initial setting command (Du)a (16 bits) The initial setting command (Du) c, b, a (48 bits) in which the setting command (Du) c, the initial setting command (Du) b, and the initial setting command (Du) a are concatenated in this order is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015
).

[LED command transmission timing chart according to the second modification]
FIG. 87 shows a batch driver, role ratio driver, and
FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to a ball payout rate/balls discharged driver; FIG. Here, the character code stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role product ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the ball output rate/number of balls discharged driver 153c is the This is the number of balls display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the pitching percentage display data (digit 2, digit 3). Further, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as "lighting data") is stored in the batch driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address part (8 bits) omitted.

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 of role ratio driver 153b
The character code (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the bit latch 167a and the lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the batch driver 153a are processed in this order. ) c, b, and a (48 bits), and then transmit the character code (digit 1) c ( 8 bits), 8-bit latch 1 of role ratio driver 153b
The character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 67b and the lighting data (digit 1) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the batch driver 153a are set to L in this order.
ED command (digit 1) c, b, a (48 bits) is generated and transmitted.

Here, the game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time it transmits an LED command (48 bits). The game microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver 153c for the number of discharged balls/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (
Digit 0)b is stored. At the same time, the batch driver 153a
lighting data (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a.

Then, by the next latch signal, the number of discharged balls display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls. At the same time, the latch signal causes the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b to receive the role ratio display data (digit 1
)b is stored. At the same time, the latch signal causes the batch driver 153a to
The lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167b.

Although not shown in FIG. 87, after that, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the character code (digit 2) c in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout ratio/number of discharged balls driver 153c.
(8 bits), the character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b, the lighting data (digit 2) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a 8 bits) in order of LED command (digit 2) c, b
, a (48 bits), and then, the driver 1
character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 53c;
Character code (digit 3) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b
b (8 bits) and the lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a are included in the LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) in this order. generated and sent in the same format.

Therefore, the next latch signal causes the payout rate display data (digit 2) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the role ratio driver 1
Character product ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of 53b. At the same time, the latch signal causes the lighting data (digit 2) a to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the batch driver 153a.

Further, the next latch signal causes the payout rate display data (digit 3) c to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the payout rate/number of discharged balls driver 153c. At the same time, the latch signal causes the role ratio display data (digit 3) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role ratio driver 153b.
b is stored. At the same time, the latch signal causes the lighting data (digit 3) a to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the batch driver 153a.

[LED data transmission processing according to the second modification]
LED driver transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing procedures of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The game microcomputer 111 first outputs an LED command (digit 0) c ( 16 bits) is generated (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0)b containing the character ratio display data (digit 0)b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003), 8-bit latch 176 of batch driver 153a
Generate an LED command (digit 0) a containing the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of special figure 1 LED) to be stored in a (A16004). Then, LED command (digit 0) c, LE
LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of D command (digit 0) b and LED command (digit 0) a are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A16007).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
LED command (
Digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A16008), and an LED command (digit 1) b including role product ratio display data (digit 1) b to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role ratio driver 153b is generated. Then (A16009), generate an LED command (digit 1) a containing the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of special figure 2 LED) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the batch driver 153a (A16010). Then, the LED command (digit 1) is concatenated in the order of LED command (digit 1) c, LED command (digit 1) b, and LED command (digit 1) a.
c, b and a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16013).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Generate an LED command (digit 2) c (16 bits) containing the payout ratio display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) to be stored in 7c (A16014), and send it to the 8-bit latch 176c of the role ratio driver 153b. LED command (digit 2
)b (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) including the lighting code (digit 2) a (display data of normal/round/first game state) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the batch driver 153a ) generates a (A16016). And LED command (digit 2
) The LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) linked in the order of c, LED command (digit 2) b, and LED command (digit 2) a is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16019).

The game microcomputer 111 controls the 8-bit latch 16 of the driver 153c for the payout ratio/number of discharged balls.
Generate an LED command (digit 3) c (16 bits) containing the payout rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) to be stored in 7d (A16020), and send it to the 8-bit latch 176d of the win ratio driver 153b. LED command (digit 3
)b (A16021), and the LE including the lighting code (digit 3) a (display data of the pending/second and third game states) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the batch driver 153a
D command (digit 3) a is generated (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
, LED command (digit 3) b, and LED command (digit 3) a (48 bits) linked in this order are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16025).

[Functions and effects of the sixth embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control), a game control program (for game control Arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing based on immutable information (program), and arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111
), driving means (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting unit (character object ratio display unit 68) based on the driving data (LED command) output by the controller 100. driving means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting section (number of digits setting section 175, duty setting section 176) for setting the light emission mode of the light emitting section (character ratio display section 68), and the game control program includes:
The main process (A1001~) for controlling the progress of the game, and the main process (A10
01 ~) is interrupted and executed (A1301 ~), and the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111), in the interruption process (A1301), the setting unit (number of digits setting unit 175, duty setting After transmitting (A15001) the initial setting data for initializing (at least one of the plurality of setting units) to the driving means (LED driver 153), the driving data (LED command) is sent to the driving means (LED to the driver 153).

As a result, even if the set value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like after the main processing, the interrupt processing can restore the LED driver 153 to normal, and the correct set value can be obtained. It is possible to output the driving data (LED command) after setting the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50), and it is possible to avoid turning off the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

In the interrupt processing (A1301), after the driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of the plurality of setting units (number-of-digits setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) The initial setting data for initializing the driving means (L
A configuration for transmitting to the ED driver 153) is also possible. In this case, in order to transmit drive data in the next interrupt process, initial setting data is transmitted to the drive means in the current interrupt process to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt processing (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, regardless of the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data, the status display device 152 (and the batch display device) 50) can be prevented from being turned off due to noise or the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (game microcomputer 111) can transmit initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) even in the main process (A1001-). As a result, it is possible to prevent the state display device 152 from being turned off even before the interrupt processing is started.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176)
is a number-of-digits setting unit 175 for setting the number of light-emitting elements (display 900) to be emitted in the light-emitting unit (character ratio display unit 68), and a duty setting unit for setting the duty ratio of the light-emitting elements (display 900). 176 and .

As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the correct setting value (the number of light emitting elements and their duty ratio (light emission intensity, brightness)) can be set. It becomes possible to output driving data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) due to noise or the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is the character ratio display unit 68 that displays the character ratio. As a result, it is possible to reliably display the character product ratio display section 68 according to the game control program even after the main processing.

[Seventh Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 89 to 93. FIG. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment, but differs from the first embodiment in the procedure for changing the test-firing test signal (test signal) to be transmitted to the test-firing test apparatus and the probability set value (set value). are different. Note that the test-firing test device is an external device that exists outside the gaming machine 10 .

The device configuration in which this embodiment is performed is similar to that shown in FIG. , setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, set value change switch 102),
It has an input port 123 , a data bus 140 , a buffer 133 and a sixth output port 141 . Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display section). note that,
As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with output ports (corresponding to test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output processing in FIG. 7).

The input port 123 , the buffer 133 (second output section), and the sixth output port 141 (first output section) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Input port 1
A setting key switch 93 and a set value change switch 102 are connected to 23 . A relay board 70 is connected to the buffer 133 . A probability setting value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141 .

Dedicated addresses are assigned to the buffer 133 (second output section) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output section).
can output information to any one of buffer 133 (test signal output port) and sixth output port 141 by specifying an address.

The probability setting value display device 143 has, for example, a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a dot display unit) indicator (LED lamp) similar to the state display device 152 shown in FIG. Lighting pattern data representing the lighting pattern (probability setting value display data)
It consists of a driver that converts to Also, the test-firing test device can be provided with a display and a driver similar to the probability setting value display device 143 .

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs information in the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the definite value of the probability setting value) or information in the working probability setting value area (temporary probability setting value) to the sixth output port 141 . Probability setting value display data corresponding to the value) is output. On the other hand, game microcomputer 11
1 outputs the information of the probability setting value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port), but does not output the information of the working probability setting value area.

As a result, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the definite value and the provisional value of the probability setting value. Also, if the test-firing test apparatus has a display device similar to the probability set value display device 143, only the definite value of the probability set value is displayed on the test-firing test apparatus.

[Probability setting value change processing of the seventh embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), but step A20002 is added between steps A2413 and A2414, and step A20003 is added between steps A2420 and A2421. is added.

In step A2002, the game microcomputer 111 outputs the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) corresponding to the same determined probability setting value as that output to the probability setting value display device 143 as a test signal. Save to data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same "10111110B" ((a, b, c, d
, e, f, g, Dp)=(1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0)) (see the sixth embodiment for lighting pattern data). As a result, the test-firing test apparatus can collect data of the definite value of the probability setting value as the test-firing test signal, and can display the definite value of the probability setting value when the test-firing test apparatus is equipped with a display.

At step A20003, the game microcomputer 111 saves the trial-firing test signal once erased at step A2418 in the test signal output data area again. This will
Even after the change processing of the probability setting value (main processing), the test-firing test device can collect data of the fixed probability setting value as a test-firing test signal, and if the test-firing test device is equipped with a display, the probability setting value can be displayed.

[Display example of the probability setting value in the probability setting display device and the test firing test device]
FIG. 90 shows the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device at the time of setting change in the seventh embodiment, in the 7-segment type (including the dot display section). 8 is a schematic diagram when displayed on an 8-segment display. FIG. Here, a case of changing the probability set value from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting values saved in the probability setting value area are saved as the test-firing test signal in the test-firing test display data area. It's becoming The test-firing test apparatus can always collect data of the definite value of the probability setting value as the test-firing test signal, and can always display the definite value of the probability setting value when the test-firing test apparatus is equipped with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed on the display of the test firing test device by the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as the test firing test signal. there is

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting becomes variable, and the game microcomputer 111 loads the value of the probability setting value area and stores it in the working probability setting value area as initial data when changing the probability setting value. Save (A1040). At this stage, step A2401 (=Y)→step A2406 (=N)→step A2407 (=N)→step A2411 (=N) in FIG. 89 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), the probability setting value display device 143 displays "1" (provisional value) as the lighting pattern data, but the The display on the display remains "1" (determined value before change).

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since (=Y), steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability set value display device 143 displays "2" (provisional value) after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period). remains "1" (fixed value before change).

If the set value change switch 102 is further depressed, step A240 in FIG.
8-Step A2410 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability set value display device 143 changes from "3"→"4"→"5".
"→"6" (both are provisional values), but the display on the display of the test firing test equipment remains at "1" (fixed value before change).

Then, when there is an input from the touch switch (step A2411 (=Y)), steps A2412, A2413, and A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value "6" ( definite value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability setting value display device 14
The display of 3 changes from "6" (provisional value) to "6" (determined value), and the display on the display of the test firing test apparatus changes from "1" (provisional value) to "6" (determined value).

Further, step A2418 is executed by executing steps A2406 (=Y) and step A2416 (=Y), and probability setting value display data (probability setting value display data) saved in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area The setting value "6") is temporarily erased, but is restored by steps A2420 and A20003. In this case, the display of the probability set value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device maintains "6" (determined value).

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 89, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value "6" is saved in the probability setting value display data area in step A2420. A20003 saves the test-firing test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability setting value "6" in the test signal output data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A
2405, A2502), the probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test fire test equipment (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90,
The probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability setting value "6" is maintained on the display of the test firing test apparatus.

[First Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 91 shows the probability setting value display device 14 at the time of setting change in the first modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram of a 7-segment display (8-segment display including a dot display section) in which the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test-fire test signal transmitted to the test-fire test device are displayed.

The probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device can display 7-segment lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) and dot data (Dp) (additional information). (see FIG. 71). The dot display part attached to the 7-segment segment lights up when the dot data (Dp) is "1" and goes out when it is "0", for example.

As described above, the output processing (step A1621, step A1622 (=Y
), step A1623 and step A1624), the test-firing test signal and the setting key switch-on information are combined and output. On the other hand, step A1621 and step A162
2 (=N), when there is no setting key switch ON information, the test firing test signal is output as it is.

In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state, a setting key switch ON signal is input to the game microcomputer 111 . Here, the setting key switch ON signal can be expressed as "1", for example. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state, it can be considered that a setting key switch OFF signal (a state in which there is no setting key switch ON signal) is input to the gaming microcomputer 111 . At this time, the setting key switch off signal can be expressed as "0", for example.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test firing test signal is set as lighting pattern data, the setting key switch ON information is set as dot data (1), the setting key switch OFF information is set as dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and dot data (Dp = 0 or 1) is output to the test firing test equipment. As a result, the final probability setting value is displayed on the test-firing test apparatus based on the lighting pattern data. Also, the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 93, that is, whether or not the setting is being changed can be grasped by the lighting/lighting out of the dot display portion according to the presence or absence of the dot data (1). In the present embodiment, dot data (1) indicates that the dot display is lit, indicating that the setting is being changed, and dot data (0) indicates that the dot display has been turned off, indicating that the setting has been changed. can do.

In this embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including lighting pattern data (determined value of probability set value) and dot data in the buffer 133 ( It is configured to output to the test-firing test device via the test signal output port) and the relay board 70 (FIG. 3). As a result, the test-firing test apparatus can grasp whether or not the setting is being changed, as well as the final value of the current probability setting value.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modification, the display of the test firing test apparatus always displays the fixed probability setting value.
Even while the probability setting value (provisional value) is being switched from "1" to "6", the probability setting value and dot lighting are maintained. Then, when the new setting value is determined, the display device of the test-firing test apparatus displays the determined value of the updated probability setting value, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the dot is extinguished. It is the same as FIG. 90 except for the lighting and extinguishing of dots.

[Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability set value change processing according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification, dot data (Dp
= 0 or 1) is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 so that the operator who changes the setting can visually determine whether the setting is being changed.

92, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step A2413a, and step A2420 is changed to step A2420a. has been changed to

At step A2406 (=N), at least the setting key switch 93 is turned on. Therefore, in step A20001, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (provisional value) before the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display section is illuminated.

At step A2409a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=1) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (temporary value) changed by the input of the setting value change switch can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display section is lit.

At step A2413a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the probability setting value (determined value) after the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while turning off the dot display section.

At step A2420a, the game microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the working probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the dot display section can be kept turned off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502), The probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test fire test equipment (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the probability setting value display device 14 at the time of setting change in the second modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram of a 7-segment display (8-segment display including a dot display section) in which the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test-fire test signal transmitted to the test-fire test device are displayed.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value "1" is displayed as the test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) on the display of the test firing test device. The information displayed on the display of the test-firing test apparatus is the same as that of the first modified example, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value display data and dot data (1) corresponding to the working probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A20001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), the probability setting value display device 143 displays "1" (provisional value) as the lighting pattern data, and the dot display portion lights up. .

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
is "Y", steps A2408 to A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, "2" (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (extinguishing period), and the dot display portion lights up.

If the set value change switch 102 is further depressed, step A240 in FIG.
8. Step A2409a and step A2410 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability set value display device 143 changes from "3" to "4" to "5" to "6" (all provisional values). , and the dot display section also lights up in conjunction with the display of the probability set value.

Then, when the touch switch is input (step A2411 (=Y)), step A
2412, steps A2413a and A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value "6" (determined value) is overwritten in the probability setting value display data area. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the display of the probability set value display device 143 is "6" (provisional value).
lights up and the dot display part lights up, then "6" (determined value) lights up and the dot display part goes out. This allows the operator to visually recognize that the probability setting value has been updated from "1" to "6".

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, as shown in FIG. 92, probability setting value display data and dot data (Dp=0) corresponding to the probability setting value (determined value) are set in step A2420a. Saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2
405, A2502), the probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (=N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the set probability display device 143 is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 93, lighting of the dot display portion of the display of the test-firing test apparatus can be omitted.

[Functions and effects of the seventh embodiment]
As described above, the game machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes game control means (the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition. In addition, when the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 includes setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing set values in accordance with game-related settings, a display section (probability set value display device 143) capable of displaying the set values, and a A first output section (sixth output port 141) that outputs lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) and a second output section (
a buffer 133 and a test signal output port). Game control means (game microcomputer 1
11) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) based on the set value, and outputs it to the display unit (probability set value display device 143) via the first output unit (sixth output port 141). , the lighting pattern data can be output to an external device (test-firing test device) via the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port) as a test signal (test-firing test signal) of the game machine.

Therefore, by using the same data as the lighting pattern for the test signal (test-firing test signal) output to the external device (test-firing test device), it is possible to ensure that the test signal is unprocessed correct information, and the display of the gaming machine 10 Even when the setting value is not displayed in the section (probability setting value display device 143), the probability setting value can be notified to an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10. FIG. In addition, when unsettled setting information during setting change is output to the first output section (sixth output port 141) and not output to the second output section (buffer 133, test signal output port), unsettled setting information is output. Setting information can be prevented from being output to the outside, and confusion due to unnecessary information can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays the lighting pattern data (
setting value (probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value can be displayed. A switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which
, the game control means, when the switch is in the ON state, additional information (dot data (Dp
= 1)), and the additional information can be output to an external device (test-firing test device) along with the test signal.

Therefore, the fixed value of the setting value is displayed on the external device (test firing test device) based on the lighting pattern data. Also, the external device can grasp the ON/OFF state of the switch (setting key switch 93), that is, whether or not the setting is being changed, based on the presence or absence of additional information (dot data (Dp=1)). In this embodiment, for example, in an external device (test firing test device),
The dot data (Dp=1) as additional information indicates that the dot display is lit, indicating that the setting is being changed. can grasp that.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays the lighting pattern data (
setting value (probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value can be displayed. A switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which
, the game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) when the switch is in the ON state, and displays the additional information along with the lighting pattern data on the display unit (probability setting value Output to the display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) on the display section (depending on whether the dot display section is illuminated), the operator who performs the setting change can determine whether the setting change is in progress or has been completed. can be determined visually.

[Eighth Embodiment]
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (Part 1) of a game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified to the minimum necessary configuration for explaining the effects of the invention. In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10
At least a game control device 100 (game control means) and a power supply device 400 (power supply means) are provided. The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (for example, AC 24V from a game island) and generates a predetermined power supply voltage (for example, DC 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V).
output to 00.

The game control device 100 includes a probability set value display device 143A (probability set value display device 143)
and a driver 143a are attached. The probability setting value display device 143A is the power supply device 4
00 is driven by receiving power (for example, DC 5V) from the normal power supply unit 410, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. driver 14
3a converts the probability set value information output from the game microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and outputs the same. The probability setting value display device 143A can display the probability setting value according to the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

A probability setting value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400 . The probability set value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without passing through the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. there is Therefore, the probability setting value display device 143B also uses the driver 143
The probability set value can be displayed by the lighting pattern data input from a. By arranging the probability set value display device 143B in the power supply device 400 in this way, it is possible to easily confirm the probability set value. Further, since the probability set value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC 5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, power is supplied from the game control device 100 to the probability set value display device 143B. Since the wiring for performing the above can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in this embodiment, the set value change switch 102 can also be attached to the power supply device 400 . As described above, the setting value change switch 102
It can also be used as an M clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve work efficiency when changing settings using the set value change switch 102 or clearing the RAM.

The display of the probability set values in the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B and the control of lighting/lighting out of the dot display section are the same as those in the seventh embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (Part 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, a DC/DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control device 100, and the output voltage is displayed by the probability setting value display device 143A.
and the probability set value display device 143B.

The arrangement of FIG. 94B is, for example, when the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC 5V) for the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B, or even if the drive voltage is generated, due to insufficient capacity. This arrangement is suitable when the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B cannot be driven. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC 12 V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC/DC converter 143b, and the output side (for example, DC 5 V) is the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B.
connected to

Here, a wiring 143c for outputting lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and a DC/DC converter 143b to the probability setting value display device 143
In the wiring 143d that supplies the drive voltage to B, a harness is formed by a portion that straddles between the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400, and a portion that is arranged in the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400 is connected to the harness. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which two connectors are formed, respectively, and the two connectors are connected by the harness. As a result, the wiring 143c and the wiring 1
43d can be reduced, and malfunction of the probability setting value display device 143B can be prevented.

[Actions and Effects of the Eighth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of the starting condition. To generate a special game state advantageous to a player when a game stop result is a special result. The game machine 10 includes a power supply means (power supply device 400) that generates a predetermined power supply voltage from the rated voltage supplied from the outside of the game machine and supplies it to the game control means, and a set value that can be changed according to settings related to the game. and setting change means (setting change device 42). The game control means (game control device 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) related to the probability set value. The power means (power supply device 400) has a display section (probability setting value display device 143B) that displays the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data).
Prepare.

Therefore, by arranging the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) in the power supply means (power supply device 400), it is possible to easily confirm the setting value, and increase the chances of confirming the setting value. .

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) is a power supply voltage (
drive voltage) is supplied. As a result, the wiring for supplying power from the game control means to the display section can be omitted, so that the cost can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is a power supply means (power supply device 4
00) and supplies it to the display section (probability set value display device 143B).

Therefore, when the power supply means (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC 5V) for the display section (probability setting value display device 143B), or even if the drive voltage is generated, the capacity is insufficient to drive the display section. voltage conversion means (DC/DC converter 143b)
can reliably supply the power supply voltage to the probability set value display device 143B.

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) can display the setting value related to the lighting pattern data and additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) different from the setting value. The means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a switch (setting key When the switch 93) is on, it generates additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) and outputs the additional information (dot data (Dp=1)) to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying the additional information (dot data (Dp=0 or 1)) on the display section (depending on whether the dot display section is illuminated), the operator who performs the setting change can determine whether the setting change is in progress or has been completed. can be determined visually from the display contents of the display section arranged in the power source means (power source device 400).

[Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to external information output when changing settings.

[Timing chart of external information output when setting is changed]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment.

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then at time u
At 3, the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

When the game machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control device 100 sets the probability set value changing flag (A1
038), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) which was in the off state (setting value display, A1615).
.

In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the character ratio display section 68 (FIG. 78) of the state display device 152 that displays the character ratio is used as the probability set value display device 143. FIG. That is, during setting change or setting confirmation, any one of the four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot parts) display devices 900 of the character ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78) has a probability Display the setting value. Note that the character product ratio is displayed in the character product ratio display section 68 except during setting change or setting confirmation. Therefore, the character product ratio display section 68 is used for both the display of the character product ratio and the display of the setting value. In addition, it is not limited to using the character object ratio display unit 68 of the state display device 152 as the probability setting value display device 143, and the content related to external information output described in the ninth embodiment 8 embodiment), the probability setting value display device 143 is changed to the state display device 15
2 may be applied independently.

Then, the state of the gaming machine shifts from the game mode to the setting change mode (variable setting state) by setting the probability set value changing flag. The game mode indicates a state of the gaming machine other than a setting change mode (setting variable state) and a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting value confirmation mode) described later.

Further, when the game machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIGS. 33A and 33B) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the explanation of the external information editing process, the setting change mode (setting variable state)
Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037), and outputs external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal to the external device (external information output ON, A1611 ). An external device (various external devices) is a device provided outside the game machine 10, such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer). In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A1037). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output in FIG. 95, for example. In this way, the game control device 100 can output a predetermined signal as external information including information about setting to an external device (for example, information indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode to be described later) has been entered in a security signal. It functions as external signal output means.

When the setting value change switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) is operated (depressed) by the operator, setting 1 is changed to setting 2 at time u4, and setting 2 is changed at time u5. Then, setting 2 changes to setting 3, and setting 3 changes to setting 4 at time u6. In this way, the set value (setting) is changed by +1 each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, and after setting 6, it is changed to setting 1 by operating the set value change switch 102 . Specifically, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the set value 1→set value 2→
Setting values (settings) are changed in the order of setting value 3→setting value 4→setting value 5→setting value 6→setting value 1→setting value 2→ . . .

After that, when the touch switch signal of the operating handle 24 is turned on at time u7, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A
The result of 2406 is "Y", the setting is confirmed). At that time, in this embodiment, in order to output as external information (predetermined signal) including information that the setting has been determined in the setting change mode in the security signal, the game control device 100 outputs the predetermined signal turn off once. That is, even when an extremely long predetermined time is set to the initial value of the security signal control timer at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, when the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs a new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, For example, 256 msec), by turning on the security signal, the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode is included in the security signal, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. After that, the game control device 100 terminates the interruption of the external information output and turns on the external information output again. The discontinuation time is the time (predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) for turning on the output of a new predetermined signal during the discontinuation, and the time before the time for turning on the output of the new predetermined signal. Time to turn off external information output (eg 256msec)
and a time (for example, 256 msec) for turning off the output of the new predetermined signal later (for example, 768 msec).

After that, at time u9, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (second mode), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417). The timer is forcibly cleared irrespective of whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. In addition, by clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability setting value display device 143 (in this embodiment, the state display device 152 (also used by the character product ratio display unit 68), the character product ratio is displayed (character product ratio display). Note that the probability setting value display device 143
The status display device 152, which is also used as a player, may display information on the ball payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and the base value (ball payout rate in the normal game state) instead of displaying information on the role product ratio ( Ball output rate display, discharge ball number display, base value display).

[Modified example of external information output timing chart when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change in FIG. 95 will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modified example of external information output timing when setting is changed according to the ninth embodiment. 96, only the external information output timing of FIG. 95 will be extracted and explained.

First, FIG. 96(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the settings in FIG. 95 are changed.

As described above, at time u3, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 (setting key) turned on, the game control device 100 outputs external information (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 temporarily interrupts the external information output, and includes the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal at time u8. After the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, eg, 256 msec) to output information (predetermined signal), the external information output is turned off.

After that, after the interruption time (for example, 768 msec) from the time u7, the game control device
In 00, after the external information output is turned on again, the external information output is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 93 (setting key) at time u9, and the gaming machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the game mode. move to

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(b), a first modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

At time u3, when the game machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control device 100 turns on external information output, as in FIG. 96(a).

Then, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output along with the setting confirmation at the time u7.

After that, at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, e.g. 256 msec) after turning on
Turn off the relevant external information output. After that, the external information output is kept off, and at time u9
, the setting key switch 93 is turned off. As described above, in the first modified example, the output of external information is terminated rather than temporarily interrupted when the setting is established at time t7, and then the output of external information is turned on for a predetermined time at time t8.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(c), a second modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

When the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u3 with the setting key switch 93 turned on, in the second modification, the external information output is kept off.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is maintained off again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modified example, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting is confirmed at time t7, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is confirmed.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 96(d), a third modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting change will be described.

At time u3, when the game machine 10 is powered on with the setting key switch 93 turned on, the game control device 100 outputs external information as in FIGS. 96(a) and (b). turn on.

After that, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. Thus, in the third modification, the ON state of the external information output is maintained from the time t3 when the power is turned on until the time t7 when the setting is confirmed, and after the setting is confirmed, the external information output is turned OFF.

[Timing chart for outputting external information when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output when settings are finalized according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u10, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11. Then, the probability setting value display device 143 (the character ratio display unit 6 of the state display device 152
8) displays the character ratio (character ratio display) because the gaming state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11 is the game mode.

Thereafter, at time u12, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on while the game machine 10 is powered on, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). , the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the character ratio was displayed (setting value display, A1615).

Then, the state of the gaming machine shifts from the game mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag.

Also, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100
External information edit processing (A1317, FIGS. 33A and 33B) in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6)
running Then, since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set as described above in the explanation of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A25
07), external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal is output to the external device (external information output ON, A1611). In this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours, etc.) as shown in the external information output in FIG. 97, for example.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag and the security signal control timer are forcibly cleared regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (A2510). The external information output is turned off, the game machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode, and the setting confirmation ends. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511), and the character ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the setting value was displayed (character ratio display ). It should be noted that, in addition to the character product ratio display, the ball output rate display, the number of discharged balls display, and the base value display may also be used.

[Modified example of timing chart for outputting external information when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation in FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modified example of external information output timing during setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment. 98, only the external information output timing of FIG. 97 will be extracted and explained.

First, FIG. 98(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output when the settings in FIG. 97 are finalized.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12.
When the (setting key) is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal).

Then, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u13, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output, and shifts the gaming machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98(b), a modification of the external information output timing at the time of setting confirmation will be described.

After the power is turned on at time u11, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 includes information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered in the security signal and transmits external information (predetermined signal ) to output external information for a predetermined time (for example, 2
56 msec) After turning on, the external information output is turned off. After that, the external information output is kept off, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the game control device includes in the security signal information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended and the game mode has been entered. external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (for example, 25
6 msec) After turning on again, the external information output is turned off. Thus, in the modified example of the timing of the external information output at the time of setting confirmation, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. The external information output is kept off except when it is turned off.

[Timing chart for outputting external information when changing settings in the modified example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing settings according to the modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing when settings are changed according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. 99 and 100, descriptions overlapping those of FIG. 95 will be omitted as appropriate.

In this modified example, a RAM initialization switch is independently provided in addition to the set value change switch 102 . When the power is turned on (power is restored), if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. Specifically, after turning on the setting key switch 93, while turning on (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch, the game machine 1
0 is turned on, it shifts to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w2. Then, at time w3, the RWM clear switch is pressed, and while the pressed state is maintained, the game machine 10 is powered on at time w4,
A probability set value changing flag is set (A1038), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. When shifting to the setting change mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) which was in the off state (setting value display, A1615). Thereafter, the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch) is operated at times w6, w7, and w8.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the probability set value changed flag is set (A2414), indicating that the probability set value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y", setting confirmed). Thus, in this modification, the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operating handle 24 .

At time w9, the setting key switch 93 is turned off so that the RA to be cleared is cleared.
The M area is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability set value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game mode, and the setting change ends. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the character ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) where the setting value was displayed. It is done (character ratio display).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example 256 msec), then the external information output is turned off. As described above, according to the timing of the external information output at the time of setting change according to the present modification, after the external information output is terminated when the setting is confirmed at time w9, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time w10.

Next, FIG. 100 shows another example in which the timing of the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is changed when the setting is changed according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. 100, only the external information output timing of FIG. 99 will be extracted and explained.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the timing of the output of a predetermined signal (external information output) when the settings in FIG. 99 are changed.

As described above, when the game machine 10 is powered on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w4, the game control device 100 receives the external information. Turn on the output.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9 (setting confirmation), the game control device 100 turns off the external information output (security signal).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 outputs external information for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example 256 msec), then the external information output is turned off. After that, the external information output is kept off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(b), a first modification will be described in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification is changed.

At time w4, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, in the first modified example, the external information output is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). After that, the external information output is kept off again. Thus, in the first modified example, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting at time w9 is finalized, and is kept off except when the setting is finalized.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 100(c), a second modification will be described in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when changing settings according to the modification is changed.

At time w4, when the game machine 10 is powered on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 changes to the state shown in FIG.
As with 0(a), turn on external information output.

After that, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. Thus, in the second modification, the ON state of the external information output is maintained from the time w4 when the power is turned on until the time w9 when the setting is confirmed, and after the setting is confirmed, the external information output is turned OFF.

[Functions and effects of the ninth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that variably displays the identification information (identification pattern, special decorative pattern, first decorative pattern A to C) is a special result ( It is possible to generate a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when a jackpot result mode, a jackpot stop symbol, a special result mode). The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) relating to gaming conditions, and an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10 (for example, an information collection terminal or a game player). In-house management device (hall computer)
) and an external signal output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information. The setting change means includes a setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting change mode) in which the setting can be changed by turning on the first mode (on). The external signal output means outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output (e.g. security signal output)) in response to the transition to the variable setting state by the setting transition means.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode), the external signal output means (game control device 100) sends information about setting to the external device (for example, when shifting to the setting change mode (information indicating the fact) is output as external information (predetermined signal), so that the game hall manager can be notified through the external device. As a result, the gaming machine 10 may be damaged at a timing not intended by the gaming facility administrator (for example, fraud, machine trouble, etc.).
When the is shifted to the setting change mode, the shift can be quickly noticed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting change means (the setting change device 42) is operated when the setting change state (setting change mode) is in progress. It has operation means (setting value change switch 102, setting switch, setting value change button). External signal output means (game control device 100), after changing the setting (setting value, probability setting value) by the change operation means, setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) to the second mode (off) A predetermined signal is output (external signal output) in response to this. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, when the settings are changed, the gaming hall manager can be notified through the external device. You can quickly notice the changes.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the external signal output means (game control device 100
) starts outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to the transition to the variable setting state (setting change mode) by the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key), and the setting transition means is switched to the second mode (OFF), the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is terminated. According to such a gaming machine 10, while in the variable setting state, the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is kept on, and it is possible to continue notifying the gaming parlor manager through the external device. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the game machine 10 has shifted to the variable setting state at an unintended timing. In addition, when a game hall manager intentionally changes settings, an external device can be used to keep a history (log) of how long the work time involved in the setting change is, making work time more efficient. It can be used as statistical information for planning.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, external signal output means (game control device 100)
corresponds to the second state (OFF) of the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key), after outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output), a predetermined pulse width ( For example, a signal of 256 msec) is output. According to such a game machine 10, the external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only while the setting variable state is set, but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is confirmed. Therefore, after the gaming machine 10 shifts to the setting variable state at an unintended timing, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the setting has been fixed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the first mode (on) is set by a condition (for example, after power-on) different from the condition for shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode). is provided. The external signal output means (game control device 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while shifting to the setting confirmation state by the setting confirmation means. According to such a game machine 10, not only when the state changes to the setting change state but also when the state changes to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to notify the game hall manager through the external device. , it is possible to quickly notice that Yuki 10 has shifted to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. The setting key switch 93 (setting key) is designed to function as both the setting transition means and the setting confirmation means.
A switch other than 3 may be provided as the setting confirmation means.

[Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. tenth
Embodiments relate to display modes of probability setting values.

[Display of collective display device]
Figure 101, stop design number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510) and the lighting pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the stop design number, the lighting pattern of the probability setting value, It is a figure which illustrates. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol patterns (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101(a) shows the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7 segment type (or 8 segment 34A, etc.) is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of the LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A, etc.).

In the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game), the game control device 100
After the identification information (special symbol, special symbol) is variably displayed by the special figure 1 display section 51, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. As the predetermined result mode after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, for example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected from the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 101(a).

Next, FIG. 101(b) is a diagram illustrating lighting patterns of probability set values.

When the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on to change the setting value (setting change mode, setting variable mode), the identification information shown in FIG. The lighting pattern indicating the later predetermined result mode is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability set value in FIG. 101(b).

Display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed) according to the present embodiment, that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-
D18), the light emission mode (lighting/lighting-out mode) is the first light emission mode described with reference to FIGS. 34A and 35 .
It can be performed in the same manner as the aspect according to the embodiment. Specifically, in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value , Numbers 1 to 6 indicating the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked (A1603-A1608 of output processing)
.

In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display section 51 displays a different display from when the variation is stopped (display different from normal), thereby making the gaming machine 10 unable to play (for example, a variation display game). It can be clearly shown on the front of the game machine 10 that it is. It should be noted that in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) at the time of fluctuation stop of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value shall not be used. As a result, the display mode of the probability setting value,
It is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode related to the game such as the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, FIG. 101(c) is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of probability set values. first
In the special figure fluctuation display unit 51, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the decimal point (dot display unit Dp) is lit and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value for work and the probability setting value are lit or It may be made to blink. In this way, when the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the working probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked, the decimal point (Dp) is lit so that the game machine 10 can set the probability. The front of the game machine 10 can indicate that it is being changed.

In addition, the stop pattern number shown in FIG. And the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game. Moreover, the probability setting value shown in FIG.101(b), (c) may be displayed on the 2nd special figure fluctuation|variation display part 52 by lighting display or blinking display. Here, even in the stop display (lighting pattern of FIG. 101 (a)) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, as well as the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51, the number 1 to 6 shall not be used.

Furthermore, every time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed and the probability set value is changed, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display of the collective display device 50 The probability setting values may be switched alternately and displayed on the unit 52 . In this way, by alternately switching and displaying the probability setting value in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, the probability setting value is changed by pressing the setting value change switch 102 It is possible to make it easier to recognize what has been done.

Also, the lighting pattern of the probability set value is displayed to be different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. A lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. In other words, there is a possibility that the lighting pattern of the probability setting value overlaps with the lighting pattern of the big win symbol, but the probability of displaying the lighting pattern of the big winning symbol is low and it is rarely displayed. In addition, when the player wins a big win, it is considered that the player continues playing until the special game state ends, so the probability that the lighting pattern of the big win symbol is displayed when the setting is changed is extremely small. Therefore, even if the lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the lost symbol is displayed as the probability setting value, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting can be recognized at the front of the gaming machine 10. can suggest.

In addition, during the probability setting change, while the probability setting value is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50, the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 And all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3-D18) of the collective display device 50 other than the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 may be displayed blinking. In this way, all the light-emitting units of the collective display device 50 other than the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 are flashed in a manner different from usual, so that the gaming machine 10 The front of the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the probability setting is being changed.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the details of the status display device 152 that displays information about the payout rate. The status display device 152 is formed by arranging four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots) indicators 900 side by side, showing digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 from the right. It is a 4-digit, 7-segment display. The status display device 152 displays the total ball output rate from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present (for example, "bL.35" shown in FIG. 102), and It is possible to switch between and display the ball hitting rate (for example, "b6.36"). Incidentally, the state display device 152 may display not only the pitching rate but also the base value and the character ratio. Further, in this embodiment, the state display device 152 is the probability setting value display device 1
43, and can display probability setting values.

Next, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the details of the state display device 152 that displays numbers indicating probability setting values.

FIG. 103(a) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed in the digit 3 at the left end. Digit 3 is a digit in which a letter other than a number (for example, "b") is displayed in the pitching percentage display shown in FIG. Therefore, by displaying the set probability value in the digit 3, the set probability value does not overlap with other displays other than the set probability value, that is, the display related to the game (for example, the display of the batting average). Also, unlike the display of the pitching rate shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 displaying the set probability value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the set probability value and other display modes such as the display of the batting average.

FIG. 103(b) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed in the second digit. As in FIG. 103(a), the digits other than the digit 2 displaying the set probability value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the probability setting value is displayed.

FIG. 103(c) shows the state display device 1 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed on the first digit.
52, and FIG. 103(d) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number indicating the set probability value is displayed in the 0th digit. Digits other than the digit 1 or the digit 0 displaying the probability set value are turned off.
Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the example shown in FIG. can.

FIG. 103(e) is an example of the state display device 152 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the set probability value is displayed on all of the digits 0 to 3. FIG. In this way, since the same numbers indicating the set probability values are arranged in all the digits of the state display device 152, the display mode becomes different from the display related to other games. It is possible to easily distinguish between display modes related to other games such as display.

Note that the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 indicates that the probability setting is being changed (setting change mode).
It is preferable to display blinking when the probability setting value for operation is set in , and light-on display when the probability setting value for displaying the established setting is displayed.

Further, when displaying the working probability set value (probability set value) in the setting change mode, each time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed to change the probability set value, The digits of the set probability values displayed on the status display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability set value is displayed as 3 in the 3rd digit, the set value change switch 102 is pressed to display the probability set value as 4 in the 2nd digit, and the set value change switch 102 is displayed as 4. By pressing again, the probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in the first digit. Also, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed at the 0th digit, the probability set value can be displayed at the 3rd digit. Note that the manner in which the digits of the probability setting values displayed on the state display device 152 are shifted one by one is not limited to the manner in which the digits are shifted from left to right, and may be shifted from right to left.

[Modification of the tenth embodiment]
In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 or state display device 152) also functions as the probability set value display device 143, and displays related to the game (for example, as a display result after changing the identification information) It was possible to display a predetermined result mode, ball output rate, base value, role ratio) and set values (probability set values) relating to game conditions. However, the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) is not limited to the mode in which the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) is also used as the probability setting value display device 143. Similar to the first embodiment, the display device (collective display device 50 and state display device 152) A set probability display device 143 may be provided on the gaming machine 10 as a second display device that is independent from the display device 152 (first display device). Further, when displaying on one display device, the display on the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143), the first display device (collective display device 50
, status display device 152) can be hidden.

[Functions and effects of the tenth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that variably displays identification information (identification pattern, special decorative pattern, first decorative pattern A to C) is a special result ( A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when a jackpot result mode, a jackpot stop symbol, a special result mode, is provided. The gaming machine 10 has a display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152) and setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing a set value (probability set value) relating to game conditions. The control means displays the setting values on the display device in a manner different from the display relating to the game in response to the changeable state of the setting values (setting change mode, variable setting state) by the setting change means. .

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the probability setting value is different from the display related to the game such as the predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display game, the ball throwing rate, the base, and the character ratio. is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the display mode of the set probability value and the display regarding the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) displays a variable display game (for example, a predetermined result mode after variable display of identification information) as a display related to the game.
The display result of the special figure variation display game) is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50), and the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting change means (setting change device 42) (setting change mode, setting In response to the variable state), the display of the display device is switched from the display related to the game to the set value. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched to the changeable state, the setting value is displayed on the display device in a manner different from the display related to the game. The state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, the display mode of the display device (collective display device 50 or state display device 152) is not limited only during the probability setting change, but also during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state). It can be a display mode different from the display related to.

The gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment displays a game-related display (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a ball-out rate, a base value, and a character ratio). possible first display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152), setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing set values (probability set values) related to game conditions, and setting values capable of being displayed and a second display device (probability setting value display device 143). The control means (game control device 100) changes the setting value in a manner different from the display related to the game in response to the changeable state of the setting value (setting change mode, variable setting state) by the setting change means. is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition are displayed on different display devices, the display regarding the game and the display regarding the game condition can be easily distinguished. .

Further, in the game machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment, the control means (the game control device 100
) displays a game-related display (for example, a predetermined result mode as a display result after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, a ball-out percentage, a base value, and a character ratio) on the first display device (collective display device 50, state display device 152), and when the setting value (probability setting value) is changed to a state (setting change mode, setting variable state) by the setting change means (setting change device 42), the first display The display related to the game of the device is hidden, and the set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143). According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is displayed on the second display device, the display related to the game on the first display device is hidden, so that the gaming machine 10 can play a game (for example, a variable display game). ) can be easily identified.

[Eleventh embodiment]
An eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit or the like.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
Figures 104A and 104B show the big hit probability and small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (Fig. 22) and the small hit determination process (Fig. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table which illustrates against.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, a small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variation display game (small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game The hit probability is 0 at each setting). In the first embodiment, a small hit occurs only as a result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the small hit probability is 0 at each setting).
is).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 104C and 104D, the big-hit flag 1 setting process and the big-hit flag 2 setting process have their control contents changed from those of the first embodiment. That is, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (Fig. 104C) of the present embodiment is the jackpot flag 2 setting process (Fig. 2
1) to "jackpot flag 2" and "special figure 2" are respectively replaced with "jackpot flag 1" and "special figure 1", and steps A17001-A17006 in FIG. 104C are steps A3701-A3706 in FIG. corresponds to In addition, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (
FIG. 104D) is equivalent to replacing "jackpot flag 1" and "special figure 1" from the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment with "jackpot flag 2" and "special figure 2" respectively. and steps A18001-A18010 of FIG. 104D are steps A3601-A36 of FIG.
10.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability of occurrence of a small hit,
Setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 increases in this order. Also, the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot occurring, also increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big win probability and the small win probability increase, the big win state (first special game state) and the small win state (second special game state) are likely to occur, and the special variable winning device 39 The number of balls acquired by winning a prize in (the big winning slot) is increased, which is advantageous to the player.

In setting 1 of pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 0 (0%) and no small hit occurs. However, with setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is about 1
close to (100%). For this reason, in the setting 6 of pattern I, in the general electricity support state (time saving state, probability variable state) where the execution frequency of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game increases, a small hit occurs almost every time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It will be in a state called "small hit RUSH" (small hit rush). In setting 6, the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, so either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at the time of high probability (missing not).

In addition, in the general electric support state, the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game is increased by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy winning state of the normal variable winning device 37 or extending the occurrence time of the easy winning state. . In addition, since the normal pattern starting gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the normal electric support state, the right hitting is more advantageous and the player should hit the right.

In the settings 4 and 5 of pattern I, the small hit probability is 1/4 and 1/2, respectively, and in the general electric support state (time saving state, probability variable state), "1/4 small hit RUSH""1/2 It will be in a state called "small hit RUSH". "1/4 small hit RUSH" and "1/2 small hit RUSH
” can obtain about 1/4 and 1/2 of the number of winning balls of “small hit RUSH”.

In setting 2 of pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the hit probability of a general normal pattern variation display game, and the number of balls acquired by the small hit is almost non-existent. In setting 3 of pattern I, the probability of a small win is about the same as the probability of a big win at the time of high probability, and the number of balls acquired by the small win exists to the extent that the player can be aware of it.

In this embodiment, regardless of the setting value, the ratio of the jackpot probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is a constant value (here, 10 times), and the probability can be easily controlled. There is

In the table of pattern II in FIG. 104A, contrary to pattern I, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern II increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, in pattern II, as the set value increases, the probability of a big win increases but the probability of a small win decreases, and the difference in the number of winning balls due to the setting (set difference) is smaller than in pattern I, resulting in better balance.

In the table of pattern III in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 4 < setting 5 < setting 6
It increases in the order of <setting 1<setting 2<setting 3. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. In Pattern III as well, the difference in the number of balls obtained by setting (setting difference) is smaller than in Pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern IV in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 3 < set 2 < set 1 <
It increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG. In pattern IV as well, the difference in the number of balls obtained by setting (setting difference) is smaller than in pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the table of pattern V in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6<setting 5<setting 4<setting 3<setting 2<setting 1. The jackpot probability of pattern V is the same for setting 1 and setting 4, the same for setting 2 and setting 5, and the same for setting 3 and setting 6. In pattern V, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting (set value) from the probability of a big hit. For this reason, the player
In an attempt to estimate a set value from the occurrence of a small hit, attention is paid to the occurrence of a small hit.

In the table of pattern VI in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% at settings 1, 2, 4, and 5
and close to 100% at settings 3 and 6. In settings 3 and 6, the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the time of high probability is 100%, so either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game at the time of high probability. (no deviation). The jackpot probability of pattern VI is the same for setting 1 and setting 4, the same for setting 2 and setting 5, and the same for setting 3 and setting 6.
Pattern VI makes it easy to estimate specific settings (settings 3 and 6) from the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at low probability of setting 1 to 3 is set to the probability of normal specifications (for example, a predetermined range around probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at low probability of setting 4 to 6 is so-called. A pattern with a probability near the sweet digispec (for example, a predetermined range around the probability of 1/99) is also conceivable. In such a pattern, it is possible to apparently provide two types of models by changing settings (set values).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can be said to have different game characteristics (game characteristics) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, eliminating the need to develop gaming machines with multiple specifications, thereby reducing development costs. leads to That is, it is possible to substantially provide the player with gaming machines with a plurality of specifications simply by changing the set values with the setting change device 42 (the setting key switch 93 and the set value change switch 102). For example, a setting in which the probability of a small hit is 0% and a probability of a small hit of about 10
If the setting is close to 0%, there is a big difference in the playability as to whether or not a small hit occurs, and it can be said that the specifications are completely different. Furthermore, since the big win probability and the small win probability change according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big win probability and the small win probability, and the interest in the game is improved. .

[Little hit open mode]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the opening mode (small winning open mode, small winning opening pattern) of the special variable winning device 39 in the small winning state (second special game state). In the example of FIG. 105, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening) is opened four times with one small win, and the opening time is 20 times.
At 0ms, the latency is 1500ms. In addition, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening)
It is also possible to open a small win mode in which is opened only once.

The game control device 100 sets the small hit opening mode to be the same regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, the control of the small hit state becomes simple. However, set from the small hit open mode itself (set value)
is difficult to estimate, and the player will estimate the setting from the small hit probability.

[Probability per normal figure]
Figure 106 shows, in the eleventh embodiment, the hit probability of the normal pattern variation display game determined as a result of the normal pattern normal processing (Fig. 32) (low probability and high probability) for each setting (each set value). It is a table which illustrates against.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the normal pattern per probability, which is the probability of normal pattern per occurrence, is set 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < at both low probability and high probability. Increase in the order of setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the probability of hitting a normal pattern increases and the probability of hitting a normal pattern increases, and the number of balls acquired by winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increase. , to the player's advantage. In this case, as in pattern I in FIG.
Setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 synergistically benefits the player.
In addition, since the normal pattern per probability changes according to the setting (set value), the player has the pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the normal pattern per probability, and the interest in the game is improved.

In the table of pattern II in FIG. 106, the normal pattern per probability, which is the probability that the normal pattern occurs, is set 1 < setting 2 < It increases in the order of setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. That is, at one of the low probability and the high probability, as the set value increases, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases and the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, and the number of balls acquired by winning the prize to the normal variable winning device 37 and the special figure The execution frequency of the two-variation display game increases, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen while waiting for customers]
FIGS. 107A and 107B are diagrams illustrating the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 during customer waiting (customer waiting state). The effect control device 300 displays an image corresponding to the setting (set value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed.

In order to do this, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, a customer waiting demonstration setting process (B130
In 8), an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the animation of the customer waiting demonstration starts. When the moving image of the customer waiting demonstration is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 after the moving image of the customer waiting demonstration ends and before the next start.

For example, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, setting 1 does not generate a small hit,
In the general electric support state at the time of right-handed hitting, it is better to win the game ball aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) rather than the special variable winning device 39 (large winning port). For this reason, in setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107A, a first character image 501 indicating game characteristics (how to play the game) is displayed on the display screen while waiting for customers (“Aim for the electric power!” when hitting right). ) is displayed. The first character image 501 clearly shows a prize winning opening to be awarded when hitting right.

Then, in the table of pattern I in FIG. 104A, since a small hit RUSH can be generated in the setting 6, in the general electric support state at the time of right hitting, the special fluctuation prize is higher than the normal fluctuation prize device 37 (second start prize opening) It is better to win the game ball aiming at the device 39 (large winning opening). For this reason, in the setting 6, the display screen for waiting for customers as shown in FIG.
character image 502 ("small win RUSH!!" when hitting right) is displayed. The second character image 502 implicitly indicates a prize winning opening that should be awarded when hitting to the right. In addition, setting 4 of pattern I
, 5, a character image is displayed on the display screen while waiting for a customer ("1/4 small win RUSH!!" when hitting right).
and "1/2 small win RUSH!!") may be displayed.

In FIGS. 107A and 107B, simultaneously with the first character image 501 or the second character image 502, an image 503 indicating that a right stroke is to be made in the general electricity support state is displayed on the screen (customer waiting screen).
to be displayed.

In addition, as in the case of pattern I, patterns II, III, IV, and V in FIGS.
, in the VI table, setting 6, setting 4, setting 3, setting 6, setting 1-2 and 4, respectively.
At −5, no small hit occurs, and the first character image 501 (“Aim for the electric power!!” when hitting right) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107(A). Also, patterns II, III, and I in FIGS. 104A and B
In the V, V, and VI tables, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, and 6, respectively
, a small hit RUSH can be generated, so the second character image 50 as shown in FIG.
2 ("small win RUSH!!" when hitting right) is displayed.

In this manner, while waiting for a customer (customer waiting state), an image corresponding to the setting (set value) can be displayed on the display device 41 to show the player the game characteristics of the setting. The game characteristics shown by the image serve as a guideline for the player to select a gaming machine.

In addition, on the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 during customer waiting, the setting (set value)
Depending on the situation, it is also possible to configure the display device 41 to display an image introducing the effects and an image of the game flow.

[Display according to display settings]
FIG. 108A shows the light emission mode of the first special figure variation display unit 51 and/or the second special figure variation display unit 52 (light emitting unit) used for executing the special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50.
An example of changing according to settings (set values) is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (I), the game control device 100, during non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, during customer waiting), the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special The display mode (light emission mode) of the lost symbol displayed in the figure variation display section 52 may be changed between setting 1 and setting 6. FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (II), the game control device 100 displays the first special figure variation display unit 51 and/or the second special figure during non-execution of the special figure variation display game (here, during customer waiting). The figure variation display section 52 may blink, and the blinking period may be changed between setting 1 and setting 6, and the light emission mode may be changed according to the setting. For example, the blinking cycle is 256 ms with setting 1 and 12 with setting 6.
8 ms. In addition, the first special figure variation display section 51 and/or the second special figure variation display section 52 are displayed blinking as the variation display of the special figure variation display game, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. .

Also, while the special figure variation display game is not being executed (during customer waiting), the first special figure variation display unit 51
And / or not only the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, other display units 53 to 6 of the collective display device 50
0 can be changed according to the setting (set value).

108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. FIG. As external devices, an external display device 864 (display device) and a game arcade internal management device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control device 100 may change the display mode of the external display device 864 provided outside the game machine 10 according to the set value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command according to the setting value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the setting value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display device) is a patrol lamp 864a capable of emitting light, and an information display device 864d capable of displaying moving and still images. The patrol lamp 864a emits light (rotating light emission) when a control command is received. When receiving a control command, the information display 864d can display data such as the number of games (display of the number of revolutions), and can also display a moving image or still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868 .

When the control command includes the setting value information of the gaming machine 10, the patrol lamp 864a can emit light in a light emission mode (emission color, etc.) according to the setting value, and the information display device 864d can emit light according to the setting value. Moving images and still images can be displayed on the display portion 868 .

As described above, the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure variation display unit 52 (light emitting unit)
, and the display mode of an external display device 864 (display device) provided outside, the player can estimate the setting (setting value).

[Actions and effects of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition,
To generate a special game state advantageous to a player when the stop result of a variable display game is a special result. The variable winning device (special variable winning device 39) can be changed from a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in a special game state. The setting change means (setting change device 42) can change the setting values regarding the game conditions (conditions for the player to play the game). The game control means generates a first special game state (jackpot state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result, A second special game state in which the game value that the player can obtain is less than that in the first special game state
A special game state (small win state) is generated. The game control means sets the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (minor win) according to the set value, and sets the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state. , set the same regardless of the set value.

Therefore, since the probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (minor win) can be set according to the set value, the playability of the gaming machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. Furthermore, the second
Since the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the special game state can be set to be the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special game state is simplified.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying effects related to the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image corresponding to the set value on the display device in a customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, in the customer waiting state, the player can easily select a gaming machine in the game arcade (game parlor) by showing the game characteristics of the current set values to the player.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the game machine 10, game control means (game control device 100)
, while the variable display game is running or not, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) used to run the variable display game is changed according to the set value can be changed by Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (special figure 1 indicator 51 or special figure 2 indicator 52) used for executing the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means can set the display mode of the display device (the patrol lamp 864a, the information display device 864d) provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value. . Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (set value) based on the display mode of the display device provided outside.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

In the twelfth embodiment, parts identification information (first
identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 are not matched, the mismatch is reported as an error.

[Game machine parts]
FIG. 109 shows how the detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10 .
Parts 510 are assigned electrically readable part identification information. for example,
The part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or a movable accessory constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44, or a frame decoration. A decoration member having an LED of the device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be used. The parts 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 in the gaming arcade for reasons such as obstruction during delivery to the gaming arcade (game parlor), and there is a possibility that an inexperienced attendant may attach the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(B),
Since a problem occurs when the parts 510B for the model B are attached to the model A of the game machine 10, the effect control device 300 notifies an error via the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device 41.例文帳に追加

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 receives the received model designation command (B
1301) is selected and set. In addition, the production control device 300,
The part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are inconsistent, the effect control device 300 reports that they are inconsistent as an error.

The part 510 has an identification substrate 513 that holds part identification information. Identification board 513
, the part identification information is one or more wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied
set by Although the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor in FIG. 109, the pull-up resistor may not be provided. In addition, the power supply (voltage) to the parts 510 is, for example, the effect control device 300 when the parts 510 are attached.
Alternatively, it is supplied from the power supply device 400 .

In FIG. 110 , a plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are connected to predetermined terminals among a plurality of (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion section 516 . In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set to a bit of value "1", and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) is set to a bit of value "0".
01111100” can be transmitted through the parallel-to-serial converter 516 .

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned parts identification information as parallel data by a plurality of wirings 519 . And the parallel-serial conversion part 516 converts the input parts identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits it to the production control apparatus 300 by serial communication ⁽ I2C here).

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification board 513 . In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by DIP switch 521 . Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is connected to the DIP switch 5
21, it becomes a predetermined voltage or ground voltage, and information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of the part identification information is input to a plurality of (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. . In the example of FIG. 111, the wire 5 with the DIP switch 521 turned on
19 is at ground voltage (a bit with a value of "0") and the dip switch 52
A terminal connected to wiring 519 with 1 turned off receives a predetermined voltage (bit of value “1”).
becomes.

[Parallel-serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows the configuration of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel-serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 includes a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF)
It has the configuration of a normal parallel-to-serial conversion IC. Parallel-serial converter 51
6 converts parallel data (for example, "01111100") as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and connects by serial communication (here, I ² C communication). It transmits to production control device 300 via line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a in I ² C communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-to-serial converter 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

A plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of serial data is completed in 8 clocks after the parallel data is fetched.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the first modification, the parallel-to-serial converter 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-to-serial conversion IC, but an input I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC). ^I2 for input
The CI/O expander 815 is connected to the master IC 300a of the production control device 300 from port 0 to
The part identification information input from 7 is input as data.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) has a transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, a filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, a driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and a connection line SCL. filter 833, bus controller 834,
and a reset signal generation circuit 839 . In addition, another I ² CI/O expander 81
5, and the I ² CI/O expander 815 itself determines whether the connection line SDA is occupied. It has a self-occupied WDT 841 for

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834 .

The driver 832 applies a voltage that enables the transistor 830 to operate when outputting data (here, part identification information, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.
Apply to 0.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used for the transistor 830 in order to suppress power consumption. , and the source is grounded.

The driver 832 transmits data (part identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a via the connection line SDA.
, a voltage is applied to the gate of transistor 830 to allow current to flow between its drain and source when outputting from . The driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834 .

A unique address is set to the I ² CI/O expander 815 by the address setting terminals A 0 to A 3 provided in the I ² CI/O expander 815 and input to the bus controller 834 . Furthermore, an address for resetting the I ² CI/O expander 815 is also preset.

A unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI/O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address portion consisting of the upper 3 bits and a variable address portion consisting of the lower 5 bits. The fixed address portion is preset with a predetermined value (eg, “110”) and cannot be changed by the I ² CI/O expander 815 .

The variable address section has a 4-bit I ² CI/O expander address corresponding to the pattern set to the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI/O expander 815, and whether the data is a read request or a write request. 1-bit R/W identification data indicating whether the In the I ² CI/O expander 815 for input, "1" is normally registered in the R/W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It determines whether or not it matches the unique address set in the /O expander 815, and if it matches, outputs data (part identification information) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A plurality of wirings 519 are connected to predetermined ports (five here) among eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI/O expander 815 to apply a predetermined voltage. is applied. Therefore, the bus controller 834 receives 8-bit parts identification information (eg, "01111100") as parallel data via eight ports 0-7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits of value "0".

Also, the bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I.
² determines whether or not it matches the reset address set in the CI/O expander 815, and if it matches, the data is taken in as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² Initialize the CI/O expander 815 .

Also, the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed from LOW to HIGH reaches eight times.
After the bus controller 834 outputs the bit-th data (parts identification information), the connection line S
When the CL signal level changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal to the bus controller 834 from the connection line SDA. Further, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the master IC 30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 has a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI/O expander 815, and a RES terminal that receives a reset signal from the outside.
ET terminal is connected.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 powers on the I ² CI/O expander 815,
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated and initialized by inputting the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834 .

Therefore, when the harness is pulled out, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for the logic is temporarily disconnected.
9 will output a reset signal. A harness is a bundle of a connection line Vcc, a connection line SDA, a connection line SCL, a ground line GND, and the like for supplying logic power.

Bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect when another I ² CI/O expander 815 occupies connection line SDA. The bus monitor WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generating circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
By activating its own reset signal generation circuit 839, the I ² CI/O expander 815
to initialize.

The self-occupied WDT 841 is connected to the connection line SD by itself (I ² CI/O expander 815).
Used to detect A's occupancy. When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 causes the reset signal generation circuit 839 to generate a reset signal to initialize the I ² CI/O expander 815 .

[Second Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the second modification, the parallel-to-serial converter 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-to-serial conversion IC, but an I ² CI/O expander 815 (slave IC) for output. Also, in the second modified example, the parts 510 are equipped with a rendering device and can perform rendering. The production device is, for example, an LED
(Light-emitting part), etc., but may be a movable accessory.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 for output is the master IC 300 of the production control device 300
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, light emitting state) of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled via ports 0 to 15 on the output side. Note that the I ² CI/O expander 815 is the I ² CI/O expander 815
is input to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 using the unique address (8 bits) of the parts identification information.

The I ² CI/O expander 815 for output is connected to the I ² CI/O expander 81 for input.
5 (FIG. 113), an output setting register 835, an output controller 836, and a driver 8 connected to ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the I ² CI/O expander 815.
37, with the addition of transistors 838A-838P connected to each port 0-15. Therefore, the description of the same configuration as the input I ² CI/O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SDA (here, effect control data, reply signal, etc.), and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies to the transistor 830 a voltage that enables the transistor 830 to operate when data (here, part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

When the driver 832 outputs data (parts identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 is operable to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply a voltage of The driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines that the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It determines whether or not it matches the unique address set in the /O expander 815, and if it matches, outputs data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The parts identification information to be output to the master IC 300a is I ²
A unique address (8 bits) for the CI/O expander 815 . It should be noted that it is not always necessary to output the parts identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a, and upon receiving a response signal from the bus controller 834, the effect control device 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the parts identification information. It may be configured to

In addition, after the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed from LOW to HIGH has reached eight times and the bus controller 834 has taken in the effect control data of the 8th bit from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL has changed to When it changes from HIGH to LOW, the response signal is transferred to the connection line SD
Output from A to the master IC 300a. Furthermore, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LO again.
When it changes to W, it opens the connection line SDA. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs the response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH nine times.

The operation mode of the I ² CI/O expander 815 and the output states of ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835 . When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI/O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 allows current to flow through all ports 0 to 15. is set to the initial state so that

Based on the data set in the output setting register 835, the output controller 836
Through the port driver 837, production devices (here, LE
D, the light emitting part), the output state (here, the light emitting state) of the production device is actually controlled by passing a current (output of lighting data). This output state is updated to the content designated by the performance control data when the bus controller 834 takes in the performance control data from the connection line SDA.

That is, based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, it is set in the output setting register 835, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0 to 15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

Driver 837 applies a voltage to transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows so that the transistors 838A to 838P can operate.

The transistors 838A-838P have their gates connected to the driver 837, their drains connected to port terminals connected to connection lines to which a voltage is applied to operate the rendering device, and their sources grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gates from the drive power source is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. By the current flowing to
It is possible to control the output state of the production device (LED in this case) connected to the port terminal.

[Third Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. FIG. In the third modification, the parallel-to-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the predetermined voltage from the plurality of wirings 519 is 8-bit parts identification information (for example, "01111100"), and the effect control device 300 has an input Direct input to port 300b (ports 0-7). Input port 30
0b is sent to the main control microcomputer (CP
U) 311. Note that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of value "1", and the other terminals (to which the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits of value "0".

Then, when the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 does not match the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information), it informs that the mismatch is an error. Execute the processing to be performed.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the game machine 10 is powered on (restored).

The main processing of the twelfth embodiment is the parts matching processing (B5
000) is added, and other processes are the same as those in FIG.

In the parts matching process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301) to obtain the parts identification information (first identification information).
and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, an error notification is issued.
In this embodiment, the parts matching process (B5000) is replaced by the received command check process (B00
14).

The parts collation process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and then repeatedly executed by a loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts verification process]
Next, referring to FIG. 117, parts collation processing (B50) in main processing (FIG. 116)
00) will be described in detail. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of parts matching processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300, first, if the collation time timer (clock means) is not 0 -1 update (B5001). The verification time timer reads the part identification information and verifies it with the model identification information (
It determines the collation timing or collation time interval for comparison. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). If the collation time timer is not 0 (B5
The result of 002 is "N"), and the matching timing is not reached, so the parts matching process ends.

On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 reads the parts identification information from the parts 510 because it is the collation timing (B5
003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, based on the model designation command.

Effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in memory (for example, program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, model specification commands and model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the parts identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). If the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error notification is issued to notify that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it is notified that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not fit (correspond) to the part 510 . The effect control device 300 may execute error notification (warning) by generating sounds from the speakers 19 a and 19 b or displaying characters on the display device 41 . Moreover, here, the effect control device 300 may refer to the reference table of FIG. A correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510 .

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation processing. Therefore, the part identification information and the model identification information are compared (verified) periodically every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the verification time timer elapses, starting with the power-on. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the parts identification information and the model identification information match (B5
005 result is "Y"), and since the part 510 is attached to the correct model compatible with (corresponding to) the part 510, the initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying the error (B50
07), ending the parts matching process.

For example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the game machine 10 (FIG. 109B), the parts matching process described above determines the model identification information (for example, "0111
1100") and the part identification information (for example, "01111101") do not match, and error notification is performed. Correct model (model B) compatible with part 510B along with error notification
may be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (Fig. 109A), the model identification information (for example, "01111100
”) and the part identification information (for example, “01111100”) match, and error notification is not executed.

In addition, as a modified example, the effect control device 300 is a memory (for example, the program ROM 321
) may hold only model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model without storing the reference table of FIG. Also in this case, the production control device 300 is the parts 510
By comparing the part identification information read from the
When the model identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the mismatch is reported as an error.

[Actions and Effects of the Twelfth Embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a starting condition), and Production control means (production control device 300) capable of executing production to
Prepare. The gaming machine 10 includes detachable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the game machine 10, reads the first identification information of the parts, compares it with the second identification information, and outputs the first identification information (parts identification information) and second identification information (model identification information)
not match, the mismatch is notified.

Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the game machine 10 that has a part (the part 510) attached incorrectly in the game hall (game shop).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the game machine 10, the effect control means is at least the game machine 1
0, the first identification information of the part (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and if the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, it is determined that they do not match. notify. Therefore, even if a wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which the component (the part 510) is incorrectly installed in the gaming arcade (game parlor) at an early stage.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and responds to the model of the gaming machine 10. The second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, gaming machine 1
When a wrong part (part 510) is attached to 0 various models, this can be notified. Also, the correct model to which the wrong part should be attached can be notified.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first
Since the identification information (parts identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, the first identification information can be easily set.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first
Since the identification information can be set by a DIP switch, the first identification information can be easily set.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 special variable winning device 40 center case 41 display device 42 setting change device 44 board effect device 44a, 44b internal accessories (inner movable member)
46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
51 1st special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 indicator)
80 lamp display device 93 setting key switch 95a external accessory (outer movable member)
102 set value change switch 143 probability set value display device 150 driver 152 state display device 153 LED driver 100 game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
400 Power supply device 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel-serial converter 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Suspension display part 640 Suspension digestion area 640A Starting memory display background 641 Effect display area 815 I2CI/O expander

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine comprising game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information,
an effect control means for controlling an effect related to the variable display game;
A first movable production means that is controlled by the production control means and performs production by operating a movable member;
a setting means capable of setting setting values relating to game conditions,
The game control means is
A predetermined signal can be output as external information to an external device provided outside the game machine,
Outputting the predetermined signal in response to the fact that the setting means has set the setting value to a settable state and that the RAM provided in the game control means has been initialized ,
Initializing the RAM in response to the setting enabled state,
When the gaming machine is powered on, the validity of the RAM is determined, and if the result of the validity determination is not valid, the game is stopped under the conditions for canceling the setting enabled state. migrate and
The RAM stores a first work area and a first stack area related to game control, a second work area and a second stack area related to gaming machine performance calculated based on the amount of game value obtained, and the first work area and stack area. an unused area between the stack area and the second work area;
The first work area is subject to the validity determination, and the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are excluded from the validity determination,
performing processing for setting the set value by the setting means during the timer interrupt;
After completing the setting of the set values, the RAM is initialized (hereinafter referred to as "initialization A") while the timer interrupt is disabled,
After the initialization A is completed, a state is established in which a timer interrupt is permitted,
In the initialization A, the setting value information, the second work area and the second stack area are not initialized,
The production control means is
By turning on the gaming machine, the initial operation of the first movable effect means can be executed,
When the game machine is turned on and set to the settable state, the initial operation of the first movable effect means is not executed in the settable state, and the first movable effect means is not executed when the settable state ends. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an initial action of a performance means. In a gaming machine comprising game control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information,
an effect control means for controlling an effect related to the variable display game;
A second movable production means that is controlled by the production control means and performs production by operating a movable member;
a setting means capable of setting setting values relating to game conditions,
The game control means is
A predetermined signal can be output as external information to an external device provided outside the game machine,
Outputting the predetermined signal in response to the fact that the setting means has set the setting value to a settable state and that the RAM provided in the game control means has been initialized ,
Initializing the RAM in response to the setting enabled state,
When the gaming machine is powered on, the validity of the RAM is determined, and if the result of the validity determination is not valid, the game is stopped under the conditions for canceling the setting enabled state. migrate and
The RAM stores a first work area and a first stack area related to game control, a second work area and a second stack area related to gaming machine performance calculated based on the amount of game value obtained, and the first work area and stack area. an unused area between the stack area and the second work area;
The first work area is subject to the validity determination, and the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area are excluded from the validity determination,
performing processing for setting the set value by the setting means during the timer interrupt;
After completing the setting of the set values, the RAM is initialized (hereinafter referred to as "initialization A") while the timer interrupt is disabled,
After the initialization A is completed, a state is established in which a timer interrupt is permitted,
In the initialization A, the setting value information, the second work area and the second stack area are not initialized,
The production control means is
By turning on the gaming machine, the initial operation of the second movable effect means can be executed,
A game machine characterized in that when the game machine is turned on and set to the settable state, the initial operation of the second movable effect means can be executed even in the settable state.

Images